Patent Publication Number: US-2022233128-A1

Title: Electrocardiogram device

Description:
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE TO ANY PRIORITY APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, filed Apr. 16, 2020, entitled “Electrocardiogram Device”, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/923,157, filed Oct. 18, 2019, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/888,271, filed Aug. 16, 2019, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/837,195, filed Apr. 23, 2019, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/835,386, filed Apr. 17, 2019. This application also claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/170,889, filed Apr. 5, 2021, titled “Physiological Measurement Devices, Systems, and Methods”. All of the above-listed applications and any and all applications for which a foreign or domestic priority claim is identified in the Application Data Sheet as filed with the present application are hereby incorporated by reference under 37 CFR 1.57. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND 
     Field 
     The present disclosure generally relates to systems, methods, and devices for monitoring a patient&#39;s physiological information. 
     Description of the Related Art 
     Hospitals, nursing homes, and other patient care facilities typically utilize a number of sensors, devices, and/or monitors to collect or analyze a patient&#39;s physiological parameters such as blood oxygen saturation level, respiratory rate, pulse rate, blood pressure, and the like. Such devices can include, for example, acoustic sensors, electroencephalogram (EEG) sensors, electrocardiogram (ECG) devices, blood pressure monitors, pulse oximeters, among others. In medical environments, various sensors/devices (such as those just mentioned) are attached to a patient and connected to one or more patient monitoring devices using cables. Patient monitoring devices generally include sensors, processing equipment, and displays for obtaining and analyzing a medical patient&#39;s physiological parameters such as blood oxygen saturation level, respiratory rate, and the like. Clinicians, including doctors, nurses, and other medical personnel, use the physiological parameters obtained from patient monitors to diagnose illnesses and to prescribe treatments. Clinicians also use the physiological parameters to monitor patients during various clinical situations to determine whether to increase the level of medical care given to patients. 
     SUMMARY 
     A wearable device configured to measure one or more physiological parameters of a user can include: a top frame, a bottom frame connected to the top frame, and an interior between the top and bottom frames; a circuit board positioned within the interior; a first temperature sensor coupled to the circuit board and configured to generate one or more signals responsive to thermal energy of the user, wherein no air gap is present between the first temperature sensor and the circuit board; and a second temperature sensor coupled to the circuit board and configured to generate one or more signals responsive to at least one of temperature within the interior and temperature outside said interior, wherein the circuit board is positioned between the first and second temperature sensors, and wherein no air gap is present between the second temperature sensor and the circuit board. In some implementations, the first and second temperature sensors are vertically aligned with one another. In some implementations, the interior of the wearable device is filled with a material such that the interior includes no void space. In some implementations, the interior of the wearable device is filled with a material such that the interior includes less than about 50% void space. In some implementations, the interior of the wearable device is filled with a material such that the interior includes less than about 20% void space. In some implementations, the interior of the wearable device is filled with a material such that the interior includes less than about 10% void space. In some implementations, the interior of the wearable device is filled with a material such that the interior includes less than about 5% void space. In some implementations, the material comprises plastic. In some implementations, the material comprises a molding material. In some implementations, the material comprises a low pressure molding material. In some implementations, the material comprises Technomelt® low pressure molding material. In some implementations, the material comprises a thermally conductive material. In some implementations, when the wearable device is in use, the first temperature sensor is configured to be positioned closer to the user than the second temperature sensor. In some implementations, the wearable device further comprises a flexible circuit connected to the circuit board, wherein the first and second temperature sensors are coupled to the circuit board via the flexible circuit. In some implementations, at least a portion of the flexible circuit wraps around an edge of the circuit board. In some implementations, the wearable device further comprises a plurality of cables and corresponding external electrocardiogram (ECG) electrodes, said external ECG electrodes configured to be secured to the user&#39;s body and output one or more signals responsive to the user&#39;s cardiac electrical activity. In some implementations, the wearable device further comprises a housing configured to receive and at least partially enclose the first temperature sensor, wherein the housing comprises a thermally conductive material. In some implementations, when the wearable device is in use, at least a portion of the housing is positioned between the user and the first temperature sensor. In some implementations, the bottom frame comprises a recessed portion extending outward from a surface of the bottom frame and comprising an opening, and wherein at least a portion of the housing extends through the opening in the recessed portion. In some implementations, the wearable device further comprises one or more processors coupled to the circuit board, the one or more processors configured to determine one or more temperature values based on said one or more signals generated by said first and second temperature sensors. In some implementations, the wearable device further comprises: a reusable portion, the reusable portion comprising said top frame, said bottom frame, said interior, said circuit board, said first temperature sensor, and said second temperature sensor; and a disposable portion configured to mechanically and electrically couple with the reusable portion, said disposable portion configured to secure to the user. In some implementations, the disposable portion comprises a plurality of cables and corresponding external electrocardiogram (ECG) electrodes, said external ECG electrodes configured to be secured to the user&#39;s body and output one or more signals responsive to the user&#39;s cardiac electrical activity. In some implementations, the disposable portion further comprises at least one internal ECG electrode. In some implementations, the disposable portion comprises at least two cables and corresponding external ECG electrodes. In some implementations, the external ECG electrodes are configured to output said one or more signals only when the disposable portion is mechanically and electrically coupled with the reusable portion. In some implementations, the disposable portion is configured to secure to skin of the user. In some implementations, the disposable portion does not include a power source. In some implementations, the disposable portion comprises a base and first substrate, said base configured to couple with the reusable portion, said first substrate comprising a thermally conductive material and configured to be positioned between the base and the user when the wearable device is in use. In some implementations, the base comprises an opening configured to align with the first temperature sensor of the reusable portion when the reusable portion and the disposable portion are coupled together, said opening configured to provide thermal communication between the first temperature sensor and a portion of skin of the user underneath the first substrate when the wearable device is in use. In some implementations, the reusable portion and disposable portion are configured to removably couple to one another. In some implementations, the reusable portion is configured to removably secure to the disposable portion while the disposable portion is secured to the user. In some implementations, the disposable portion is configured to remain secured to the user after the reusable portion is removed from the disposable portion. 
     An electrocardiogram (ECG) device can include: a base configured for placement on a user&#39;s body; a plurality of cables and corresponding external ECG electrodes, said external ECG electrodes configured to be secured to the user&#39;s body and further configured to detect electrical signals indicative of cardiac activity of the user; a circuit layer comprising a first plurality of conductive strips, each of the first plurality of conductive strips electrically connected to a respective one of the plurality of cables; and a first internal ECG electrode electrically connected to a first portion of the circuit layer, the first internal ECG electrode configured to be secured to a first portion of the user&#39;s body underneath the base when the ECG device is in use, wherein the first portion of the circuit layer is movable relative to a remainder portion of the circuit layer. In some implementations, the circuit layer is a flexible circuit. In some implementations, the first portion of the circuit layer is formed by a slit extending through the circuit layer. In some implementations, the first portion of the circuit layer is cut away from the remainder portion. In some implementations, the circuit layer comprises a first aperture and a first conductive ring positioned along the first aperture, the first conductive ring electrically connected to the first internal ECG electrode. In some implementations, the ECG device further comprises: a second internal ECG electrode electrically connected to a second portion of the circuit layer, the second internal ECG electrode configured to be secured to a second portion of the user&#39;s body underneath the base when the ECG device is in use, wherein the second portion of the circuit layer is movable relative to said remainder portion and said first portion of the circuit layer. In some implementations, the second portion of the circuit layer is formed by a slit extending through the circuit layer. In some implementations, the second portion of the circuit layer is cut away from the remainder portion. In some implementations, the first and second portions of the circuit layer are independently movable relative to one another. In some implementations, the circuit layer comprises a second aperture and a second conductive ring positioned along the second aperture, the second conductive ring electrically connected to the second internal ECG electrode. In some implementations: the circuit layer further comprises at least one ground pad spaced from the first plurality of conductive strips; and each of the plurality of cables comprises a first wire electrically connected to one of the first plurality of conductive strips and a second wire electrically connected to one of the at least one ground pad. In some implementations: the plurality of cables comprises four cables; the first plurality of conductive strips comprises four conductive strips; the at least one ground pad comprises two ground pads; the first wire of each of the four cables is electrically connected to one of the four conductive strips; the second wire of each of two of the four cables is connected to a first one of the two ground pads; and the second wire of each of the other two of the four cables is connected to a second one of the two ground pads. In some implementations, the circuit layer further comprises a second plurality of conductive strips, the second plurality of conductive strips configured to transmit the electrical signals indicative of the user&#39;s cardiac electrical activity. In some implementations, the ECG device further comprises: a disposable portion, the disposable portion comprising said base, said plurality of cables and corresponding external ECG electrodes, said circuit layer, and said first internal ECG electrode; and a reusable portion configured to mechanically and electrically couple with the disposable portion, the reusable portion comprising a plurality of electrical connectors configured to electrically connect with the second plurality of conductive strips of the circuit layer of the disposable portion when the reusable portion is coupled with the disposable portion. In some implementations, the base comprises a plurality of pin supports, each of the plurality of pin supports configured to support one of the second plurality of conductive strips of the circuit layer. In some implementations, each of the plurality of pin supports is flexible. In some implementations, each of the plurality of pin supports is not straight. In some implementations, each of the plurality of pin supports is arcuate. In some implementations, the plurality of pin supports extends above a top surface of the base of the disposable portion. In some implementations, the reusable portion and disposable portion are configured to removably couple to one another. In some implementations, the reusable portion is configured to removably secure to the disposable portion while the disposable portion is secured to the user. In some implementations, the disposable portion is configured to remain secured to the user after the reusable portion is removed from the disposable portion. In some implementations, the external ECG electrodes are configured to output said one or more signals only when the disposable portion is mechanically and electrically coupled with the reusable portion. In some implementations, the disposable portion does not include a power source. In some implementations, the reusable portion is configured to provide power to the disposable portion. In some implementations, the disposable portion does not include a processor. 
     For purposes of summarizing the disclosure, certain aspects, advantages and novel features of the inventions have been described herein. It is to be understood that not necessarily all such advantages can be achieved in accordance with any particular embodiment of the inventions disclosed herein. Thus, the inventions disclosed herein can be embodied or carried out in a manner that achieves or optimizes one advantage or group of advantages as taught herein without necessarily achieving other advantages as can be taught or suggested herein. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       Various embodiments will be described hereinafter with reference to the accompanying drawings. These embodiments are illustrated and described by example only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the disclosure. In the drawings, similar elements have similar reference numerals. 
         FIG. 1A  illustrates a perspective view of a patient monitoring system in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 1B  illustrates another perspective view of the patient monitoring system of  FIG. 1A . 
         FIG. 1C  illustrates a schematic diagram of the patient monitoring system of  FIG. 1A  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 1D  illustrates another schematic diagram of the patient monitoring system of  FIG. 1C  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2A  illustrates a perspective view of an ECG device. 
         FIG. 2B  illustrates a perspective view of a disposable portion of the ECG device of  FIG. 2A . 
         FIG. 2C  illustrates a perspective view of a reusable portion of the ECG device of  FIG. 2A . 
         FIG. 2D  illustrates a schematic diagram of the ECG device of  FIG. 2A . 
         FIG. 2E  illustrates a dock of the disposable portion of the ECG device shown in  FIG. 2B . 
         FIG. 2F  illustrates an exploded, top perspective view of the dock of  FIG. 2E . 
         FIG. 2G  illustrates an exploded, bottom perspective view of the dock of  FIG. 2E . 
         FIG. 2H  illustrates a side view of the dock of  FIG. 2E . 
         FIG. 2I  illustrates a top view of a flexible circuit of the dock of  FIG. 2E . 
         FIGS. 2J and 2K  illustrate top perspective views of a hub of the reusable portion of the ECG device shown in  FIG. 2C . 
         FIGS. 2L-2M  illustrate bottom perspective views of the hub of  FIGS. 2J-2K . 
         FIG. 2N  illustrates a side view of the hub of  FIGS. 2J-2K . 
         FIG. 2O  illustrates an exploded, top perspective view of the hub of  FIGS. 2J and 2K . 
         FIG. 2P  illustrates an exploded, bottom perspective view of the hub of  FIGS. 2J and 2K . 
         FIG. 2Q  illustrates an exploded view of a portion of the hub of  FIGS. 2J and 2K  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2R  illustrates a perspective view of the hub and dock of the ECG device of  FIG. 2A  and further illustrates a method of mating the hub and dock in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2S  illustrates a side, cross-sectional view of the ECG device of  FIG. 2A  on a patient, showing relative position of a temperature sensor with respect to the patient in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2T  illustrates a side, cross-sectional view of the ECG device of  FIG. 2A  on a patient, showing relative position of an internal electrode of the ECG device with respect to the patient in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2U  illustrates a block diagram depicting a method of collecting physiological data using the ECG of  FIG. 2A  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2V  illustrates a top view of a flexible circuit in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 2W-2X  illustrate example electrical connections between cables and the flexible circuit of  FIG. 2V  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 2Y  illustrates a perspective view of another embodiment of a disposable portion of an ECG device. 
         FIGS. 2Z and 2AA  illustrate top perspective views of a dock of the disposable portion of  FIG. 2Y . 
         FIG. 2BB  illustrates a top view of the dock of  FIGS. 2Z-2AA . 
         FIG. 2CC  illustrates a bottom view of the dock of  FIGS. 2Z-2AA . 
         FIGS. 2DD-2EE  illustrate front and back views of the dock of  FIGS. 2Z-2AA . 
         FIGS. 2FF-2GG  illustrate side views of the dock of  FIGS. 2Z-2AA . 
         FIG. 2HH  illustrates an exploded, top perspective view of the dock of  FIGS. 2Z-2AA . 
         FIG. 2II  illustrates an exploded, bottom perspective view of the dock of  FIGS. 2Z-2AA . 
         FIG. 3A  illustrates a perspective view of another embodiment for an ECG device. 
         FIG. 3B  illustrates a perspective view of a disposable portion of the ECG device of  FIG. 3A . 
         FIG. 3C  illustrates a perspective view of a reusable portion of the ECG device of  FIG. 3A . 
         FIG. 3D  illustrates a schematic diagram of the ECG device of  FIG. 3A . 
         FIG. 3E  illustrates a dock of the disposable portion of the ECG device shown in  FIG. 3B . 
         FIG. 3F  illustrates an exploded, top perspective view of the dock of  FIG. 3E . 
         FIG. 3G  illustrates an exploded, bottom perspective view of the dock of  FIG. 3E . 
         FIG. 3H  illustrates a side view of the dock of  FIG. 3E . 
         FIG. 3I  illustrates a top view of a flexible circuit of the dock of  FIG. 3E . 
         FIGS. 3J and 3K  illustrate top perspective views of a hub of the reusable portion of the ECG device shown in  FIG. 3C . 
         FIG. 3L  illustrates a bottom perspective view of the hub of  FIGS. 3J-3K . 
         FIG. 3M  illustrates an exploded, top perspective view of the hub of  FIGS. 3J and 3K . 
         FIG. 3N  illustrates an exploded, bottom perspective view of the hub of  FIGS. 3J and 3K . 
         FIG. 3O  illustrates a perspective view of the hub and dock of the ECG device of  FIG. 3A  and further illustrates a method of mating the hub and dock in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 3P  illustrates a side, cross-sectional view of the ECG device of  FIG. 3A  on a patient, showing relative position of a temperature sensor with respect to the patient in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 3Q  illustrates a side, cross-sectional view of the ECG device of  FIG. 3A  on a patient, showing relative position of an internal electrode of the ECG device with respect to the patient in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 3R  illustrates a block diagram depicting a method of collecting physiological data using the ECG of  FIG. 3A  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 4A-4C  illustrates various views of an ECG packaging device in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 4D  illustrates various views of electrodes in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 4E  illustrates an alternative configuration of the ECG packaging device of  FIG. 4A  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 5A-5B  illustrate perspective views of a blood pressure monitor. 
         FIG. 5C  illustrates a top view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5D  illustrates a bottom view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5E  illustrates a side view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5F  illustrates another side view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5G  illustrates a front view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5H  illustrates a back view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5I  illustrates a perspective view of a blood pressure cuff. 
         FIG. 5J  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the blood pressure cuff of  FIG. 5I . 
         FIG. 5K  illustrates the blood pressure cuff of  FIG. 5I  secured to the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B . 
         FIG. 5L  illustrates the blood pressure cuff of  FIG. 5I  in a first orientation with the blood pressure monitor secured thereto in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 5M  illustrates the blood pressure cuff of  FIG. 5I  in a second orientation with the blood pressure monitor secured thereto in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 5N-5O  illustrate perspective views of a portion of the blood pressure cuff of  FIG. 5I  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 5P-5Q  illustrate cross-sections of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 5R  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the cross-section view shown in  FIG. 5Q . 
         FIGS. 5S-5T  illustrate exploded perspective views of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 5U-5V  illustrate perspective views of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B  with portions removed in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 5W-5X  illustrate cross-section views of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 5Y  illustrates another perspective view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 5A-5B  with portions removed in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 5Z and 5AA  illustrate exploded views of a valve of the blood pressure monitor. 
         FIGS. 5AB-5AJ  illustrate example blood pressure cuffs in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 6A  illustrates a perspective view an embodiment of a blood pressure monitor assembly in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 6B  illustrates another perspective view of the blood pressure monitor assembly of  FIG. 6A . 
         FIG. 6C  illustrates a side view of the blood pressure monitor assembly of  FIG. 6A . 
         FIG. 6D  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the blood pressure monitor assembly as shown in  FIG. 6C . 
         FIG. 6E  illustrates an exploded view of the blood pressure monitor assembly of  FIG. 6A . 
         FIGS. 6F-6I  illustrate perspective views of a blood pressure monitor of the assembly of  FIG. 6A . 
         FIG. 6J  illustrates a top view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I . 
         FIG. 6K  illustrates a bottom view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I . 
         FIG. 6L  illustrates a side view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I . 
         FIG. 6M  illustrates another side view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I . 
         FIG. 6N  illustrates a front view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I . 
         FIG. 6O  illustrates a back view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I . 
         FIG. 6P  illustrates an enlarged perspective view of a portion of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I  shown in  FIG. 6F . 
         FIG. 6Q  illustrates an enlarged perspective view of a portion of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I  as shown in  FIG. 6H . 
         FIG. 6R  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the housing of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 6F-6I  as shown in  FIG. 6M . 
         FIGS. 6S-6T  illustrate perspective views of a cradle of the assembly of  FIG. 6A . 
         FIG. 6U  illustrates a top view of the cradle of the blood pressure monitor of  FIG. 6S-6T . 
         FIG. 6V  illustrates a bottom view of the cradle of the blood pressure monitor of  FIG. 6S-6T . 
         FIG. 6W  illustrates a side view of the cradle of the blood pressure monitor of  FIG. 6S-6T . 
         FIG. 6X  illustrates another side view of the cradle of the blood pressure monitor of  FIG. 6S-6T . 
         FIG. 6Y  illustrates a front view of the cradle of the blood pressure monitor of  FIG. 6S-6T . 
         FIG. 6Z  illustrates a back view of the cradle of the blood pressure monitor of  FIG. 6S-6T . 
         FIG. 7A  illustrates an exploded view of another embodiment of a blood pressure monitor assembly in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 7B-7C  illustrate perspective views of a blood pressure monitor of the assembly of  FIG. 7A . 
         FIG. 7D  illustrates a top view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C . 
         FIG. 7E  illustrates a bottom view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C . 
         FIG. 7F  illustrates a side view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C . 
         FIG. 7G  illustrates another side view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C . 
         FIG. 7H  illustrates a front view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C . 
         FIG. 7I  illustrates a back view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C . 
         FIG. 7J  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the view of the blood pressure monitor shown in  FIG. 7G . 
         FIG. 7K  illustrates a cross-section view of the blood pressure monitor of  FIGS. 7B-7C  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 7L  illustrates an enlarged perspective view of the cross-section shown in  FIG. 7K  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 7M  illustrates another enlarged perspective view of the cross-section shown in  FIG. 7K  in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 7N-7O  illustrate perspective views of a cradle of the assembly of  FIG. 7A . 
         FIG. 7P  illustrates a top view of the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O . 
         FIG. 7Q  illustrates a bottom view of the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O . 
         FIG. 7R  illustrates a side view of the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O . 
         FIG. 7S  illustrates another side view of the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O . 
         FIG. 7T  illustrates a front view of the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O . 
         FIG. 7U  illustrates a back view of the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O . 
         FIG. 7V  illustrates the cradle of  FIGS. 7N-7O  connected to an example blood pressure cuff in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 8A  illustrates a perspective view of a patient monitor assembly with connected cables in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 8B  illustrates another perspective view of the patient monitor assembly of  FIG. 8A  without cables attached. 
         FIG. 8C  illustrates an exploded view of the patient monitor assembly of  FIG. 8B . 
         FIG. 8D  illustrates a top view of a patient monitor of the assembly of  FIG. 8B . 
         FIG. 8E  illustrates a bottom view of the patient monitor of  FIG. 8D . 
         FIG. 8F  illustrates a side view of the patient monitor of  FIG. 8D . 
         FIG. 8G  illustrates another side view of the patient monitor of  FIG. 8D . 
         FIG. 8H  illustrates a front view of the patient monitor of  FIG. 8D . 
         FIG. 8I  illustrates a back view of the patient monitor of  FIG. 8D . 
         FIG. 8J  illustrates a perspective view of a cradle of the assembly of  FIG. 8B . 
         FIG. 8K  illustrates a top view of the cradle of  FIG. 8J . 
         FIG. 8L  illustrates a bottom view of the cradle of  FIG. 8J . 
         FIG. 8M  illustrates a side view of the cradle of  FIG. 8J . 
         FIG. 8N  illustrates another side view of the cradle of  FIG. 8J . 
         FIG. 8O  illustrates a front view of the cradle of  FIG. 8J . 
         FIG. 8P  illustrates a back view of the cradle of  FIG. 8J . 
         FIG. 8Q  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the patient monitor shown in  FIG. 8G . 
         FIG. 8R  illustrates an enlarged, perspective view of the view shown in  FIG. 8Q  with a portion of the patient monitor removed in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 8S  illustrates an enlarged, perspective view of the view shown in  FIG. 8Q  with a portion of the patient monitor removed in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 8T  illustrates a top view of the enlarged view of  FIG. 8R . 
         FIG. 8U  illustrates a perspective view of a locking tab assembly of the patient monitor in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIG. 8V  illustrates a bottom view of the locking tab assembly of  FIG. 8U . 
         FIGS. 9A-9C  illustrate various views of a cable management prong in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
         FIGS. 10A-22B  illustrate various example graphical user interfaces in accordance with aspects of this disclosure. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
     The present disclosure describes various devices, systems, and methods for monitoring one or more physiological parameters of a patient. 
     The present disclosure will now be described with reference to the accompanying figures, wherein like numerals refer to like elements throughout. The following description is merely illustrative in nature and is in no way intended to limit the disclosure, its application, or uses. It should be understood that steps within a method may be executed in different order without altering the principles of the present disclosure. Furthermore, the devices, systems, and/or methods disclosed herein can include several novel features, no single one of which is solely responsible for its desirable attributes or which is essential to practicing the devices, systems, and/or methods disclosed herein. 
     Overview of Patient Monitoring Systems 
     This disclosure describes patient monitoring systems that can include a patient monitor (also referred to herein as “user interface monitor” and “vital signs monitor”) attached to a patient and also to one or more physiological sensors. The patient monitor can collect physiological data from the various connected sensors and can process and/or display such data or information related to such data on a screen of the patient monitor. In some cases, the patient monitor includes a wireless transmitter or transceiver that can transmit such data or information to a patient monitor away from the patient. In some cases, the patient monitor can be a stand-alone unit which can present (via a screen) a significant amount of physiological information to the patient or to a caregiver. The patient monitoring system and/or the various components thereof (for example, the sensors/devices) can minimize the total amount of cables in the system. For example, one or more of the sensors/devices of the patient monitoring system can indirectly connect to the patient monitor via another one of the one or more sensors/device in the system. For example, where the system includes an ECG device, a blood pressure monitor, and a patient monitor, the ECG device can connect directly to the blood pressure monitor and indirectly to the patient monitor via a single cable directly connecting the blood pressure monitor and the patient monitor. Further, the blood pressure monitor can include bypass functionality which allows incoming data from the ECG device to be passed directly to the outgoing cable connecting the blood pressure monitor to the patient monitor (for example, without having the incoming ECG device data be processed by a processor of the blood pressure monitor). Such “indirect” cable connection between the ECG device and the patient monitor can decrease the length of cable required and can allow for improved cable management of the patient monitoring system as a whole. 
       FIGS. 1A-1B  illustrate a patient monitoring system  100 . The patient monitoring system  100  can include one or more physiological sensors attached to a patient  111 . For example, the patient monitoring system  100  can include an acoustic sensor  150 , an ECG device  110 , a blood pressure monitor  600  (also referred to herein as “blood pressure sensor” or “blood pressure device” or “blood pressure measurement device” or “blood pressure monitoring device”), an optical sensor  140 , and/or a patient monitor  130  (also referred to herein as “user interface monitor” and “vital signs monitor”). Additional sensors and/or devices other than those illustrated in  FIGS. 1A-1B  can also be incorporated into the system  100 . Any or all of the sensors/monitors  110 ,  120 ,  130 ,  140 , and/or  150  cables  103 ,  105 ,  107 ,  114 , and/or blood pressure cuff  121  can be reusable, disposable, or resposable. Resposable devices can include devices that are partially disposable and partially reusable. For example, the acoustic sensor  150  can include reusable electronics but a disposable contact surface (such as an adhesive) where the sensor  150  comes in to contact with a skin of patient  111 . As another example and as described in more detail below, ECG device  110  can include a reusable portion and a disposable portion. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B , the ECG device  110  can have multiple cables  114  connected to electrodes  112  and can be connected to the blood pressure monitor  120  via cable  105 . As also shown, the blood pressure monitor  120  can be connected to the patient monitor  130  via cable  107 . The system  100  can include additional sensors that can be connected to patient monitor  130 . For example, the system  100  can include an acoustic sensor  150  that can be connected to the patient monitor  130  with cable  103  and/or an optical sensor  140  that can be connected to the patient monitor  130  via cable  109 . The ECG device  110  can be secured to a chest of patient  111 . The blood pressure monitor  120  can be secured to an arm of the patient  111  and/or a blood pressure cuff  121  that can be secured to the arm. The patient monitor  130  can be secured to a forearm of patient  111 , for example, via a fastening strap  131  that can be secured to or through a portion of the patient monitor  130  and around the forearm. The acoustic sensor  150  can be secured to a neck of the patient  111 . The optical sensor  140  can be secured to a finger of a patient  111 , for example, an index finger of patient  111 . 
     The electrocardiograph (ECG) device  110  of system  100  can be used to monitor electrical activity of the heart of the patient  111 . The ECG device  110  can include one or more cables  114  which can be coupled to one or more external electrodes  112 . The ECG device  110  can include one, two, three, four, five, six or seven or more cables  114  and/or corresponding electrodes  112 . The ECG device  110  is further illustrated in  FIGS. 2A-2U  and is described in more detail below. 
     The blood pressure monitor  120  of system  100  can be utilized alongside an blood pressure cuff  121  to measure blood pressure data of the patient  111 . The blood pressure cuff  121  (also referred to herein as “cuff”) can be inflatable and/or deflatable. Cuff  121  can be an oscilometric cuff that is actuated electronically (e.g., via intelligent cuff inflation and/or based on a time interval) to obtain blood pressure information of patient  111 . Such blood pressure data can be transferred to the patient monitor  130  via cable  35 . The blood pressure monitor  120  is further illustrated in  FIGS. 5A-5AA  and is described in more detail below. The blood pressure monitor  120  can have the characteristics and/or functionality as described in in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. 
     The optical sensor  140  can include one or more emitters and one or more detectors for obtaining physiological information indicative of one or more blood parameters of the patient  111 . These parameters can include various blood analytes such as oxygen, carbon monoxide, methemoglobin, total hemoglobin, glucose, proteins, glucose, lipids, a percentage thereof (e.g., concentration or saturation), and the like. The optical sensor  140  can also be used to obtain a photoplethysmograph, a measure of plethysmograph variability, pulse rate, a measure of blood perfusion, and the like. Information such as oxygen saturation (SpO 2 ), pulse rate, a plethysmograph waveform, perfusion index (PI), pleth variability index (PVI), methemoglobin (MetHb), carboxyhemoglobin (CoHb), total hemoglobin (tHb), glucose, can be obtained from optical sensor  140  and data related to such information can be transmitted to the patient monitor  130  via cable  109 . The optical sensor  140  can be a pulse oximeter, for example. 
     The acoustic sensor  150  of system  100  (also referred to as an “acoustic respiratory sensor” or “respiratory sensor”) can comprise an acoustic transducer, such as a piezoelectric element. The acoustic sensor  150  can connect to the patient monitor  130  via cable  103 . The acoustic sensor  150  can detect respiratory and other biological sounds of a patient and provide signals reflecting these sounds to a patient monitor. The acoustic sensor  150  can be a piezoelectric sensor or the like that obtains physiological information reflective of one or more respiratory parameters of the patient  111 . These parameters can include, for example, respiratory rate, inspiratory time, expiratory time, inspiration-to-expiration ratio, inspiratory flow, expiratory flow, tidal volume, minute volume, apnea duration, breath sounds, rales, rhonchi, stridor, and changes in breath sounds such as decreased volume or change in airflow. In addition, in some cases the respiratory sensor  150 , or another lead of the respiratory sensor  150  (not shown), can measure other physiological sounds such as heart rate (e.g., to help with probe-off detection), heart sounds (for example, S1, S2, S3, S4, and murmurs), and changes in heart sounds such as normal to murmur or split heart sounds indicating fluid overload. In some implementations, a second acoustic respiratory sensor can be provided over the chest of the patient  111  for additional heart sound detection. 
     The acoustic sensor  150  can be used to generate an exciter waveform that can be detected by the optical sensor  140  at the fingertip, by an optical sensor attached to an ear of the patient, by an ECG device  110 , or by another acoustic sensor. The velocity of the exciter waveform can be calculated by a processor in the patient monitor  130  and/or the blood pressure device  120 . From this velocity, the processor can derive a blood pressure measurement or blood pressure estimate. The processor can output the blood pressure measurement for display. The processor can also use the blood pressure measurement to determine whether to trigger the blood pressure cuff  121 . 
     As illustrated in  FIGS. 1A-1B , patient monitoring system  100  includes various cables connecting the physiological sensors together and/or to the patient. As discussed above, the patient monitor  130  can advantageously connect to each of the various sensors  110 ,  120 ,  140 , and/or  150  to gather various physiological data of the patient  111 , process such data, and can conveniently display such data and/or information related to such data on a display screen for patient and/or caregiver viewing convenience. As shown, such cables can include one or more cables  114 , cable  103  connected to the acoustic sensor  150 , cable  105  connected to the ECG device  110 , cable  107  connected to the blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or cable  109  connected to the pulse oximeter  140 . With all such sensors/device in the system  100  and all such cables connecting these sensors/devices, cable management can be difficult. Advantageously, system  100  and the various components thereof (sensors/devices) can be oriented, structured, and/or designed to effectively manage the various cables. 
     For example, while it is advantageous that data from each of the various sensors be transmitted to the patient monitor  130 , such transmission can be provided indirectly through other ones of the sensors/devices of the system  100 . As shown, in some instances where the system  100  includes the ECG device  110 , the blood pressure monitor  120 , and the patient monitor  130 , instead of having the ECG device  110  connect directly to the patient monitor  130  (where such cable may have to span or cross a gap between the patient&#39;s  111  chest and the patient&#39;s arm) the ECG device  110  can connect, via cable  105 , directly to the blood pressure device  120  which can be secured to an upper arm of patient  111  as shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B . Further, when the ECG device  110  is attached to the chest of the patient  111  and the patient monitor  130  is attached to an arm (for example, wrist or lower arm) of the patient  111 , such indirect connection can result in shorter cable lengths. Decreasing the length of cables connecting the various sensors/devices can reduce or eliminate problems associated with cabling, including, discomfort and/or annoyance for monitored patients, interference with movement of the patient and/or a caregiver&#39;s ability to interact with, engage, assess, and/or treat a patient. 
       FIG. 1B  illustrates the system  100  as shown in  FIG. 1A , but on an opposite side of the patient  111 . Advantageously, connection techniques discussed above with reference to  FIG. 1A  are equally applicable where system  100  is secured to a right side of the patient  111 . System  100  can include one or more cable management prongs (such as cable management prong  900  discussed further below with reference to  FIGS. 9A-9C ) which can secure to various portions of patient  111  and can also secure to portions of any of cables  103 ,  105 ,  107 , and/or  109 . 
       FIG. 1C  illustrates a schematic diagram of the system  100 .  FIG. 1C  schematically illustrates how patient monitor  130  can obtain information from one or more physiological sensors or monitors. Patient monitor  130  can connect (via cables or wirelessly) to one or more physiological sensors to obtain various physiological information regarding a monitored patient such as is discussed above. Patient monitor  130  can be configured to store, process, transmit, transmit without processing, display, and/or display without processing the physiological information received from the one or more physiological sensors of the system  100 . Patient monitor  130  is a processing device, and as such, can include the necessary components to perform the functions of a processing device. For example, patient monitor  130  can include one or more processors (such as one, two, three, or four processors which can be dedicated to processing certain physiological parameters and/or processing physiological information from certain sensors/devices), a memory device, a storage device, input/output devices, and communications connections, all connected via one or more communication bus. 
     As shown, patient monitoring system  100  can include the ECG device  110  and/or the blood pressure monitor  120 . As also shown, the ECG device  110  and/or the blood pressure monitor  120  can connect to patient monitor  130  and transmit physiological information to patient monitor  130 . Each of the ECG device  110  and/or the blood pressure monitor  120  can connect directly to the patient monitor  130  with a cable (or wirelessly). Alternatively, one or both of the ECG device  110  and the blood pressure monitor  120  can connect indirectly to the patient monitor  54 . For example, the ECG device  110  can connect directly to the blood pressure monitor  120  (such as with cable  105 ), which then connects directly to patient monitor  130  (such as with cable  107 ). As discussed above, such “indirect” connection between the ECG device  110  and the patient monitor  130  can be beneficial, for example, where a number of physiological sensors/devices are attached to the patient  111  and cables are used to connect the various physiological sensors/devices to each other or the patient monitor  130 . As discussed above, such “indirect” connection can reduce lengths and/or amount of cables proximate a monitored patient which can in turn reduce patient discomfort, reduce potential “snags” or cable dislodgement, and increase patient movement ability, among other things. 
     In some cases, the cable  103  can be configured to connect to either a connector port on the blood pressure monitor  120  or a connector port on the patient monitor  130 . Additionally or alternatively, in some cases, the cable  105  can be configured to connect to either a connector port on the blood pressure monitor  120  or a connector port on the patient monitor  130 . Advantageously, this can provide flexibility for the connectivity of the system  100  where the blood pressure monitor  120  is not included. Additionally, in some cases, the blood pressure monitor  120  includes one or more connector ports on an end thereof. This can additionally allow for a smaller cable length between the blood pressure monitor  120  and one or more of the ECG device  110  and/or acoustic sensor  150  when the system  100  is secured to the patient  111  in the configuration shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B . Cables  103 ,  105 , and  107  can include identical connectors on ends thereof. For example, with reference to  FIGS. 2C, 5A, and 8A , connector ends  105   a ,  107   a , and/or  103   a  of cables  105 ,  107 , and/or  103  can be identical. The blood pressure monitor  120  and the patient monitor  130  can include one or more identical connector ports that are configured to electrically connect to the connectors one such ends of cables  103 ,  105 , and  107 . Advantageously, such configuration can allow the cables  103 ,  1095 , and/or  107  to electrically connect to either the blood pressure monitor  120  or the patient monitor  130 , which can provide flexibility in the configuration of system  100 . For example, such configuration can provide flexibility as to which of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , patient monitor  130 , and/or acoustic sensor are included and/or arranged. In one non-limiting example, the ECG device  110  is secured to a chest of a monitored patient, the blood pressure monitor  120  is secured to the patient&#39;s arm (for example, the bicep and/or upper arm of the patient), the acoustic sensor  150  is secured to a neck of the patient, the optical sensor  140  is secured to a finger of the patient (for example, index finger), and the patient monitor  130  is secured to a portion of the arm of the patient (for example, the forearm of the patient). 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 1C , the ECG device  110  can connect directly to the blood pressure monitor  120  with cable  105  and the blood pressure monitor  120  can connect directly to the patient monitor  130  with cable  107 . The blood pressure monitor  120  can include bypass functionality that allows the blood pressure monitor  120  to pass physiological information received from the ECG device  110  to the patient monitor  130  without processing, storing, or otherwise altering the received information. For example, the blood pressure monitor  120  can include a bypass bus configured to transmit physiological information received from the ECG device  110  without processing the information. Additionally, the blood pressure monitor  120  can transmit physiological information that it obtains from its own measurement components along with the received information from the ECG device  110 . Such transmission of the blood pressure monitor&#39;s  120  physiological information can be simultaneous or non-simultaneous with the transmission of the physiological information from the ECG device  110 . Alternatively, the blood pressure monitor  120  can be configured to process or partially process the physiological information received from the ECG device  110  before transmitting to the patient monitor  130  (for example, via cable  107 ). 
     As discussed above, the patient monitoring system  100  can include sensors in addition or as an alternative to the ECG device  110  and/or blood pressure monitor  120 . Such additional sensors can also be configured to connected, either directly or indirectly, to patient monitor  130 . For example, patient monitoring system  100  can include the acoustic sensor  150  which can connect to patient monitor  130  via cable  103  (or wirelessly). Additionally or alternatively, patient monitoring system  100  can include the optical sensor  140 , which can connect to patient monitor  130  via cable  109  (or wirelessly). While the acoustic sensor  150  and the optical sensor  140  are shown as connected to patient monitor  130  independent from the ECG device  110  and blood pressure monitor  120 , one or both of the acoustic sensor  150  and the optical sensor  140  can alternatively be configured to connect to one of the ECG device  110  and the blood pressure monitor  120 . For example, the acoustic sensor  150  can connect directly to the blood pressure monitor  120  and indirectly to the patient monitor  130  via cable  103 . For example, system  100  can include the acoustic sensor  150 , the blood pressure monitor  120  and no ECG device  110 , and an end of cable  105  can connect to the blood pressure monitor  120  where the ECG device  110  could otherwise connect. Blood pressure monitor  120  can include a bypass bus configured to transmit physiological information received from the acoustic sensor  150  without processing the information. Additionally, similar to that described with respect to the ECG device  110  above, the blood pressure monitor  120  can transmit physiological information that it obtains from its own measurement components along with the received information from the acoustic sensor  150  to the patient monitor  130 . Such transmission of the blood pressure monitor&#39;s  120  physiological information can be simultaneous with the transmission of the physiological information from the acoustic sensor  150 . Alternatively, the blood pressure monitor  120  can be configured to process or partially process the physiological information received from the acoustic sensor  150  before transmitting to the patient monitor  130 . Blood pressure monitor  120  can include a single bypass bus configured to transmit physiological information received from the ECG device  110  and/or the acoustic sensor  150  to the patient monitor  130  without processing. Alternatively, blood pressure monitor  120  can include multiple bypass buses, each of the bypass buses dedicated to one of the ECG device  110  and/or the acoustic sensor  150 . Blood pressure monitor  120  can include multiple connector ports and/or connectors configured to connect to one or more cables connecting the ECG device  110  and/or the acoustic sensor  150  to the blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     Patient monitor  130  can be configured to transmit physiological information received from one or more of the ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , and/or the optical sensor  140  to an external patient monitor  160 . The external patient monitor  160  can be, for example, a nurse&#39;s station, a clinician device, pager, cell phone, computer, multi-patient monitoring system, hospital or facility information system. An artisan will appreciate that numerous other computing systems, servers, processing nodes, display devices, printers, and the link can interact with and/or receive physiological information from the patient monitor  130 . 
       FIG. 1D  illustrates details of the patient monitoring system  100  and the patient monitor  130  in a schematic form. As discussed above, the patient monitoring system  130  can include one or more of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , and/or optical sensor  140 , connected, indirectly or directly, to patient monitor  130 . The patient monitoring system  130  can include one or more additional sensors  180  that can also connect indirectly or directly to patient monitor  130 . ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , optical sensor  140 , and/or any additional sensors  180  can transmit physiological data to a sensor interface  132  of the patient monitor  130 . The sensor interface  132  can pass the received physiological data to a processing and memory block  134 . The processing and memory block  134  can include one or more processors configured to process the physiological data received from one or more of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , optical sensor  140 , and/or any additional sensors  180  into representations of physiological parameters. The processing and memory block  134  can include a plurality of processors that are independently dedicated to processing data from different ones of the physiological sensors described above. For example, the processing and memory block  134  can include a first processor dedicated to processing data from the ECG device  110  and/or blood pressure monitor  120 , a second processor dedicated to processing data from the acoustic sensor  150 , and/or a third processor dedicated to processing data from the optical sensor  140 . The processing and memory block  134  can include an instrument manager which may further process the received physiological parameters for display. The instrument manager may include a memory buffer to maintain this data for processing throughout a period of time. The memory buffer may include RAM, Flash, or other solid state memory, magnetic or optical disk-based memories, combinations or the same or the like. As discussed above, the patient monitor  130  can include a wireless transceiver  136 . Wireless transceiver  136  can wireless transmit the physiological information received from the above-described physiological sensors and/or parameters from the one or more processors and/or the instrument manager of the processing and memory block  134 . Wireless transceiver  136  can transmit received physiological data to an external device (such as external patient monitor  160 ) via a wireless protocol  170 . The wireless protocol can be any of a variety of wireless technologies such as Wi-Fi (802.11x), Bluetooth®, ZigBee®, cellular telephony, infrared, RFID, satellite transmission, proprietary protocols, combinations of the same, and the like. 
     In some cases, one or more of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , and/or optical sensor  140  incorporated in system  100  can receive power from the patient monitor  130 . In some cases, one or more of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , and/or optical sensor  140  incorporated in system  100  do not have an independent power source and rely upon the patient monitor  130  for power in order to operate. For example, one or more of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , and/or optical sensor  140  incorporated in system  100  can be configured to be in a non-operational mode unless and/or until an indirect and/or direct electrical connection is made with the patient monitor  130 . As discussed further below, the patient monitor  130  can be configured to be charged from an external power source, such as charging station  1000  and/or charging cradle  1100 . 
     Physiological Parameter Calculations 
     One or more of the devices discussed above can enable independent determination of certain physiological data. In some instances, the data processed from the respective devices can be used for the purposes of correlation or increasing accuracy. In some instances, the data processed from multiple devices may be aggregated to determine a particular physiological condition. Furthermore, in some instances, the independent sources of data can be used in determination of alarms. 
     Cardiac Parameters: Cardiac activity may be determined from ECG device  110 , optical sensor  140 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and acoustic sensor  150 . In some instances, the cardiac activity determined from the respective sensors can be used to improve accuracy of parameters related to cardiac activity. For example, the parameters can be averaged from different sources. Furthermore, deviation in the parameters can be used to determine confidence. In some instances, certain parameters derived from a particular system may be given a higher priority than if it is derived from a different system. For example, with respect to cardiac parameters, in some instances, parameters derived from the ECG device  110  may have the highest priority. Accordingly, if there is discrepancy between parameters derived from the ECG device  110  and parameters derived from the optical sensor  140 , the parameters derived from the ECG device  110  may be used for further processing. In some instances, parameters derived from the ECG device  110  may have a higher weight. Furthermore, in some instances, cardiac parameters derived from the optical sensor  140  may have a higher priority than cardiac parameters derived by the blood pressure monitor  120 . Additionally, in some instances, parameters derived by the blood pressure monitor  120  may have a higher priority than parameters derived by the acoustic sensor  150 . Cardiac parameters can include for example, pulse rate or heart rate. Cardiac parameters can also include cardiac tone. In some instances, cardiac tone can be selected based on either parameters derived from the ECG device  110  or parameters derived from the optical sensor  140 . The tone can be modulated by oxygen saturation (SpO 2 ) values derived by optical sensor  140 . 
     Respiratory Rate: In some instances, respiratory rate measurements may be determined from three different sources: acoustic sensor  150 ; optical sensor  140 ; and the ECG device  110  (for example, impedance). A combined respiration rate may be determined from these three different sources. As discussed above with respect to cardiac parameters, rates from independent sources can be averaged or weighted according to a priority. In some examples, the respiration rate derived from the acoustic sensor  150  has a higher priority than respiration rate derived from impedance of ECG device  110 , which may in turn have a higher priority than respiration rate derived from the optical sensor  140 . As discussed above, priorities can determine weight and alarm management conditions. 
     ECG Features: The ECG data collected can be used for ST/QT segment analysis, beat classification, and arrhythmia detection. 
     Temperature Features: The temperature measurements can be obtained from one or more temperature sensors in the ECG device  110  as discussed below. In some instances, a wireless sensor can be used to determine temperature. The wireless sensor is described in more detail in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2018/0103874, filed Oct. 12, 2017, titled “Systems and Methods for Patient Fall Detection”, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. This wireless sensor can be disposable. The wireless sensor can also be used for detecting patient orientation and fall. In some instances, the functionality of the wireless sensor can be integrated directly in the ECG device  110  because the ECG device  110  include an accelerometer and/or gyroscope as discussed below. Therefore, in some instances, the ECG device  110  can detect temperature and patient&#39;s orientation including fall detection as described in more detail in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2018/0103874. When both the ECG device  110  and the wireless sensor are used, the temperature readings from the additional sensor may have a higher priority than temperature readings from the ECG device  110 . 
     Posture/Fall Sources: In some instances, multiple devices may include an accelerometer and/or gyroscope that measures motion data. For example, the patient monitor  130 , the blood pressure monitor  120 , the ECG device  110 , and the wireless sensor discussed above may all include an accelerometer and/or a gyroscope. The wireless sensor may connect to the patient monitor  130  via Bluetooth® or an alternative wireless communication protocol. As discussed above, the functionality of the ECG device  110  and the wireless sensor can be fused into a single device. In some instances, the wireless sensor may be used by itself when the ECG device  110  is not available or needed. As these devices are placed in different positions on the patient&#39;s body, the accelerometer and gyroscope data can be used to determine overall patient&#39;s orientation. For example, the motion data from the patient monitor  130  provides indication of the wrist motion. The motion data from the blood pressure monitor  120  provides indication of the arm motion. The motion data from the ECG device  110  and the wireless sensor can provide motion data from the patient&#39;s chest and/or back. The collective motion data can be used to determine for example if a patient is walking, exercising, lying down, or has fallen. The collective motion data can therefore provide information on a patient&#39;s posture. 
     Alarm Priority: In some instances, the interactions between devices can determine alarm priority. For example, when the blood pressure monitor  120  is measuring blood pressure, it can affect readings from the optical sensor  140 . Accordingly, alarms corresponding to the optical sensor  140  may be suspended or muted while the blood pressure monitor  120  is measuring (inflating/deflating cuff). In some examples, the following order may be used for alarming priorities with highest priority to lowest priority: 1) Lethal Arrhythmia, 2) Apnea, 3) SpO2, 4) Cuff over pressure/time, 5) Cardiac analysis, 6) Cardiac Rate, 7) Respiration Rate, 8) NIBP, and 9) temperature. 
     Calibration: In some instances, features from the acoustic sensor  150  can be correlated with the blood pressure monitor  120  derived features such as systolic, mean, and diastolic pressure. The correlation can be used for the purposes of calibration. Furthermore, features from the optical sensor  140  derived waveform, the ECG device  110  derived waveform can be used for determining pulse arrival time. The pulse arrival time can be used to determine pulse transit time, which can also be obtained from the acoustic sensor  150  derived waveform. Based on these pulse parameters, an indication of blood pressure can obtained, which can be calibrated periodically or over certain time periods with blood pressure measurements derived from the blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     ECG Device 
     Electrocardiogram (ECG) is a widely accepted noninvasive procedure that detects the electronic impulses that travel through a patient&#39;s heart. It is often used to detect problems and/or abnormal conditions that may be related to the patient&#39;s heart. Temperature is also a widely accepted indicator of patient&#39;s health. Temperatures that are too low or too high can negatively impact a patient&#39;s metabolic rate, organ function, and/or can cause tissue damage. By collecting and monitoring ECG and temperature data of a patient, care providers can detect and/or prevent harmful conditions such as infections, cardiac arrest, stroke, and other types of conditions. 
       FIG. 2A  illustrates an ECG device  110  (also referred to herein as “ECG sensor”). ECG device  110  can be attached to different parts of the patient  111  such as the patient&#39;s chest, back, arms, legs, neck, head, or other portions of the body of the patient.  FIGS. 1A-1B  illustrates ECG device  110  attached to the chest of the patient  111 . With reference to  FIGS. 1A-1B, 2A, and 5A , ECG device  110  can be connected to the blood pressure monitor  120  via cable  105 . For example, the connector  105   a  of cable  105  can connect to the connector port  516  of the blood pressure monitor  120 . In some cases, connector  105   a  is identical to connector  107   a  of cable  107 . In such cases, ECG device  110  can connect directly to the patient monitor  130  via connection of connector  105   a  to a connector port of the patient monitor  130 , such as connector port  832  ( FIG. 8I ). This can advantageously provide flexibility in the connection of the ECG device  110  when the blood pressure monitor  120  is not included in system  100 , for example). In some variants, cable  105  is permanently secured to ECG device  110  at the connector port  250  (see  FIGS. 2A and 2O-2P ). For example, an end of cable  105  can be permanently hard-wired to a circuit board of the ECG device  110  and thus can be not removably securable like connector  105   a.    
     The ECG device  110  can detect electrical signals responsive to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity and can transmit such signals, and/or physiological parameters responsive to such signals, to other patient monitoring systems and/or devices. The detected signals and/or physiological parameters can be transmitted to other patient monitoring systems and/or devices via wires or various wireless communication protocols. For example, as discussed above, the ECG device  110  can interact and/or be utilized along with devices/sensors  120 ,  130 ,  140 , and/or  150 . 
     The ECG device  110  can have the functional and/or computational capabilities to calculate physiological parameters (for example, heart rate, precise body temperature values, among others) using raw physiological data (for example, raw temperature data, raw ECG data responsive to patient cardiac activity, among others). In this regard, the ECG device  110  can transmit raw, unprocessed electrical signals or physiological data, and/or processed, calculated physiological parameters to other patient monitoring devices and/or systems, such as those discussed elsewhere herein (for example, the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or the patient monitor  130 ). 
     With reference to  FIGS. 2A-2D , the ECG device  110  can include a disposable portion  203  (also referred to herein as “disposable device”) and a reusable portion  205  (also referred to herein as “reusable device”). The disposable portion  203  can include a dock  204  (also referred to herein as a “base”), one or more external electrodes  112 , and one or more cables  114 . The one or more external electrodes  112  can be coupled to the dock  204  via the one or more cables  114 . The coupling between the external electrodes  112  and the dock  204  is further described below. 
     The external electrodes  112  can detect electrical signals from the patient  111  responsive to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity. The electrodes  112  can be placed at various locations on the patient  111  including chest, head, arm, wrist, leg, ankle, and the like. The electrodes  112  can be coupled to one or more substrates that provide support and/or adhesion. For example, the electrodes  112  can include a substrate configured to removably secure the external electrodes  112  to the patient  111  (for example, skin of the patient) to allow for ease in repositioning the electrodes  112 . The substrate can provide improved electrical conductivity between the external electrodes  112  and the patient  111 . The substrate can be waterproof. The substrate can be a silicone adhesive, for example. Each of the externals electrodes  112  can include designs (such as a unique design) that can be used to provide instruction to a user or caregiver in placing and/or arranging the electrodes  112  on a patient&#39;s body, as discussed further below with reference to  FIGS. 4A-4E . 
     The electrical signals collected by the electrodes  112  can be transmitted to the dock  204  via the cables  114 . One end of the cable  114  can be coupled to the external electrode  112  while the other end of the cable  114  can be coupled to the dock  204 . For example, the cables  114  can be soldered to the electrodes  112  and/or soldered to an electrical circuit of the dock  204  (such as the flexible circuit  225  as discussed below). The cables  114  can be flexible. The length of the cables  114  can be varied to provide flexibility to caregivers when placing the external electrodes  112  at various locations of the patient  111 . The length of the cables  114  depicted in  FIGS. 2A-2B  is illustrative only is not intended to limit the scope of this disclosure. 
       FIG. 2C  illustrates a perspective view of the reusable device  205 . The reusable device  205  can include a hub  206  (also referred to herein as “cover”), a cable  105 , and/or a connector  105   a . The hub  206  can transmit electrical signals to other devices and/or systems, including multi-parameter patient monitoring systems (MPMS), via the cable  105  and the connector  105   a . Additionally or alternatively, the hub  206  can wirelessly transmit electrical signals to other devices and/or systems. For example, the hub  206  can include a wireless transmitter or transceiver configured to wirelessly transmit electrical signals (for example, signals related to patient temperature and/or heart activities) using different types of wireless communication technology such as Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi, near-field communication (NFC), and the like. In some variants, the reusable device  205  does not include a cable or a connector. 
     The hub  206  can be of various shapes and/or sizes. For example, as shown in  FIG. 2C , the hub  206  can be rectangular in shape and/or can have rounded edges and/or corners. The hub  206  can be shaped to mate with the dock  204 . For example, the hub  206  can be sized and/or shaped to facilitate mechanical and/or electrical mating with the dock  204 . Additional details regarding the mating of the hub  206  and the dock  204  are described further below. 
       FIG. 2D  illustrates a schematic diagram of the ECG device  110 . As discussed above, the ECG device  110  can include the disposable device  203  and the reusable device  205 . The disposable device  203  can include a dock  204  coupled to one or more external electrodes  112  that detect and transmit electrical signals from the patient  111  through the cables  114 . The dock  204  can receive the electrical signals from the external electrodes  112  (for example, via flexible circuit  225 ) and transmit them to the reusable device  205 . The external electrodes  112  can be placed at various locations relative to where the dock  204  is placed. For example, the dock  204  can be placed proximate, adjacent, and/or above the patient&#39;s heart and the external electrodes  112  can be placed at various locations on the patient&#39;s chest. 
     The external electrodes  112  can be color-coordinated and/or include graphics or visualizations that can advantageously aid a caregiver properly position and/or secure the electrodes  112  to portions of a patient&#39;s body so that accurate ECG data is collected. For example, with reference to  FIGS. 2A-2B and 4D , the external electrodes  112  can include a label portion  112   a  that can indicate a name, number, or other identifier of a particular electrode  112 , for example, with reference to another electrode or a plurality of other electrodes  112  (see “RA”, “V1”, “V3”, “LL” in  FIG. 4D ). As also shown, the external electrodes  112  can include a placement indicator  112   b  which can indicate a proper positioning and/or placement of a particular electrode  112  with reference to another electrode  112 , a plurality of other electrodes  112 , and/or the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  of the ECG device  110 . For example, where the ECG device  110  includes four electrodes  112 , each of the electrodes  112  can include a unique placement indicator  112   b  that graphically illustrates the proper placement of the particular electrode  112  with respect to each of the other electrodes  112 , the cables  114 , and/or the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  on a user&#39;s body (for example, chest). As another example, where the ECG device  110  includes two electrodes  112 , each of the electrodes  112  can include a unique placement indicator  112   b  that graphically illustrates the proper placement of the particular electrode  112  with respect to each of the other electrodes  112 , the cables  114 , and/or the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  on a user&#39;s body (for example, chest). Portions of the unique placement indicators  112   b  can be color coordinated with actual colors of the cables  114  and/or the electrodes  112 . In some variants, each unique placement indicator  112   b  includes a shape of the particular electrode and/or associated cable in a solid line and include shapes representing other electrodes and/or the dock in dotted line to enable differentiation. In some variants, the shapes of the particular electrode and/or the associated cable in each unique placement indicator  112   b  have a color that matches a color of an associated cable  114 . While a body is illustrated on the electrodes  112 , the design of the body is not limiting and can be sized and/or shaped in a variety of ways. Further, instead of a body, a square or other shape can be placed on the electrodes  112  and the placement indicators  112   b  can be shown therein. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 2A-2B , the graphics on the electrodes  112  (as shown in the enlarged view of  FIG. 4D ) can be oriented in a certain orientation when coupled to the dock  204  with cables  214 . For example, as shown, the unique label portion  112   a , body, and/or unique placement indicator  112   b  for each electrode can be oriented to be “upside down” with respect to a view as shown in these figures. For example, the unique label portion  112   a , body, and/or unique placement indicator  112   b  for each electrode can be oriented so that a lower portion of the body is closer to the dock  204  that an upper portion of the body (e.g., head) and/or so that the unique label portion  112   a  are “upside down” when a viewer is viewing the disposable portion  203  in a direction from the electrodes  112  towards the dock  204  (see  FIG. 2B ). Such orientation and/or configuration can be advantageous where the disposable portion  203  is secured to the packaging device  400  described below. For example, such orientation and/or configuration can allow a user (e.g., a caregiver) to conveniently visualize proper positioning and/or order of securing the electrodes  112  and/or the dock  204  to a patient&#39;s body when removing the electrodes  112  and/or the dock  204  from the packaging device  400  (see  FIG. 4B ). 
     The disposable device  203  can include one or more external electrodes  112 . For example, the disposable device  203  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more external electrodes  112 . As another example, as illustrated by  FIGS. 2A-2B , the disposable device  203  can include four external electrodes  112 . As another example, the disposable device  203  can include two external electrodes  112 . 
     The dock  204  of the disposable device  203  can include one or more internal electrodes  211 . For example, the dock  204  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more internal electrodes  211 . For example, as illustrated in  FIGS. 2F-2G , the dock  204  can include two internal electrodes  211 . As another example, the dock  204  can include one internal electrode  211 . In some cases, one of the internal electrodes  211  is configured to be a ground or reference electrode. 
     The total number of electrodes (including both external and internal electrodes) can be two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, or twelve or more electrodes. For example, the disposable device  203  can include four external electrodes  112 , four cables  114 , and two internal electrodes  211 . In another example, the disposable device  203  can include two external electrodes  112 , two cables  114 , and two internal electrodes  211 . In another example, the disposable device  203  can include two external electrodes  112 , two cables  114 , and one internal electrode  211 . In yet another example, the disposable device  203  can include four external electrodes  112 , four cables  114 , and no internal electrode  211 . In yet another example, the disposable device  203  can include one external electrode  112 , one cable  114 , and one internal electrode  211 . In another example, the disposable device  203  can include two external electrodes  112 , two cables  114 , and no internal electrodes  211 . The number of external electrodes  112  coupled to the dock  204  of the disposable device  203  and the number of internal electrodes  211  housed within the dock  204  can be varied in various examples of disposable device  203  of the ECG device  110 . 
     As mentioned above,  FIG. 2D  illustrates a schematic representation of the ECG device  110 . As shown, the reusable device  205  can include a processor  207 , a memory  208 , one or more temperature sensors  209 , and/or a motion sensor  210 . The memory  208  can be a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a static random access memory (SRAM), or a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), and the like. The memory  208  can store various types of physiological data (raw and/or processed) related to the patient  111 . For example, the memory  208  can store raw and/or processed physiological data related to patient temperature and electrical activity of the heart. The data related to the electrical activity of the heart can represent rhythm and/or activity of the heart. As discussed further below, the memory  208  can be utilized in combination with a memory on the disposable device  203  to enable, among other things, verification of whether the disposable device  203  is an authorized product. For example, the disposable device  203  can include a PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM that can be read by the reusable portion  205  to enable the reusable portion  205  to verify whether the disposable device  203  is an authorized product. 
     As discussed above, the reusable device  205  can include a motion sensor  210 . The motion sensor  210  can measure static (for example, gravitational force) and/or dynamic acceleration forces (for example, forces caused by movement or vibration of the motion sensor  210 ). By measuring one or both of static and dynamic acceleration forces, the motion sensor  210  can be used to calculate movement or relative position of the ECG device  110 . The motion sensor  210  can be an AC-response accelerometer (for example, charge mode piezoelectric accelerometer, voltage mode piezoelectric accelerometer), a DC-response accelerometer (for example, capacitive accelerometer, piezoresistive accelerometer), a microelectromechanical system (MEMS) gyroscope, a hemispherical resonator gyroscope (HRG), vibrating structure gyroscope (VSG), a dynamically tuned gyroscope (DTG), fiber optic gyroscope, and the like. The motion sensor  210  can measure acceleration forces in one-dimension, two-dimensions, or three-dimensions. With calculated position and movement data, care providers may be able to map the positions or movement vectors of the ECG device  110 . Any number of motion sensors  210  can be used collect sufficient data to determine position and/or movement of the ECG device  110 . 
     The motion sensor  210  can be and/or include a three-dimensional (3D) accelerometer. The motion sensor  210  can be and/or include an accelerometer similar or identical to those discussed in U.S. application Ser. No. 15/253,536, filed Aug. 31, 2016, titled “Patient-Worn Wireless Physiological Sensor,” now U.S. Pat. No. 10,226,187, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. The term 3D accelerometer as used herein includes its broad meaning known to a skilled artisan. Measurements from the accelerometer can be used to determine a patient&#39;s orientation. The accelerometer can measure and output signals related to a linear acceleration of the patient with respect to gravity along three axes (for example, three, mutually orthogonal axes). For example, one axis, referred to as “roll,” can correspond to the longitudinal axis of and/or extending through the patient&#39;s body (for example, along a length and/or height of the patient). Accordingly, the roll reference measurement can be used to determine whether the patient is in the prone position (for example, face down), the supine position (for example, face up), or on a side. Another reference axis of the accelerometer is referred to as “pitch.” The pitch axis can correspond to the locations about the patient&#39;s hip (for example, an axis extending between and/or through the patient&#39;s hips). The pitch measurement can be used to determine whether the patient is sitting up or lying down. A third reference axis of the accelerometer is referred to as “yaw.” The yaw axis can correspond to a horizontal plane in which the patient is located. When in bed, the patient can be supported by a surface structure that generally fixes the patient&#39;s orientation with respect to the yaw axis. Thus, in certain embodiments, the yaw measurement is not used to determine the patient&#39;s orientation when in a bed. The three axes that the accelerometer can measure linear acceleration with respect to can be referred to as the “X,” “Y,” and “Z” axes. The accelerometer can provide acceleration information along three axes, and it can provide acceleration information which is the equivalent of inertial acceleration minus local gravitational acceleration. In some embodiments, the accelerometer may be a tri-axial accelerometer, and the output of the accelerometer may include three signals, each of which represents measured acceleration along a particular axis. The output of the accelerometer can be 8-bit, 12-bit, or any other appropriate-sized output signal. The outputs of the accelerometer may be in analog or digital form. The accelerometer can be used to determine the position, orientation, and/or motion of the patient to which the ECG device  110  is attached. 
     The motion sensor  210  can additionally or alternatively be and/or include a gyroscope. The motion sensor  210  can be and/or include a gyroscope similar or identical to those discussed in U.S. application Ser. No. 15/253,536, filed Aug. 31, 2016, titled “Patient-Worn Wireless Physiological Sensor,” now U.S. Pat. No. 10,226,187, the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. The gyroscope can be a three-axis digital gyroscope with angle resolution of two degrees and with a sensor drift adjustment capability of one degree. The term three-axis gyroscope as used herein includes its broad meaning known to a skilled artisan. The gyroscope can provide outputs responsive to sensed angular velocity of the ECG device  110  or portions thereof (for example, the dock  204 ) when attached to the patient with respect to three orthogonal axes corresponding to measurements of pitch, yaw, and roll (for example, see description provided above). A skilled artisan will appreciate that numerous other gyroscopes can be used in the ECG device  110  without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. In certain embodiments, the accelerometer and gyroscope can be integrated into a single hardware component which may be referred to as an inertial measurement unit (IMU). In some embodiments, the IMU can also include an embedded processor that handles, among other things, signal sampling, buffering, sensor calibration, and sensor fusion processing of the sensed inertial data. In other embodiments, the processor can perform these functions. And in still other embodiments, the sensed inertial data are minimally processed by the components of the ECG device  110  and transmitted to an external system, such as the patient monitor  130 , for further processing, thereby minimizing the complexity, power consumption, and cost of the ECG device  110 , which may be or contain a disposable components as discussed elsewhere herein. 
     Incorporating the motion sensor  210  in the ECG device  120  can provide a number of benefits. For example, the ECG device  110  can be configured such that, when the motion sensor  210  detects motion of the patient above a threshold value, the ECG device  110  stops collecting and/or transmitting physiological data. As another example, when the motion sensor  210  detects motion of the patient above a threshold value, the ECG device  110  stops collecting, processing, and/or transmitting physiological data responsive to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity and/or temperature data of the patient. As another example, when the motion sensor  210  detects acceleration and/or angular velocity of the patient above a threshold value, the ECG device  110  stops collecting, processing, and/or transmitting physiological data responsive to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity and/or temperature data of the patient. This can advantageously reduce or prevent noise, inaccurate, and/or misrepresentative physiological data from being processed, transmitted, and/or relied upon (for example, by caregivers assessing the patient&#39;s wellness). 
     As discussed above, the reusable device  205  can include one or more temperature sensors  209 . For example, the reusable device  205  can include one, two, three, four, five, or six or more temperature sensors  209 . The temperature sensor(s)  209  can measure temperature of the patient  111  at and/or proximate to a location where the ECG device  110  is placed. The temperature sensor(s)  209  can measure temperature of the skin of the patient  111 . Additionally or alternatively, the temperature sensor(s)  209  can measure ambient temperature, for example, temperatures outside the reusable device  205  and/or temperatures inside the reusable device  205  (such as at or near a circuit board of the reusable device  205 ). The temperature data collected from the patient  111  by the temperature sensor(s)  209  may be used to determine a core body temperature of the patient  111 . The temperature sensor(s)  209  can be in electronic communication with the processor  207  and can transmit the temperature data to the processor  207 . In one example, temperature sensor(s)  209  can be an infrared temperature sensor. Placement and/or arrangement of the temperature sensor(s)  209  within the reusable device  205  and/or with respect to the disposable device  203  can be varied to facilitate thermal communication between a user&#39;s skin and the temperature sensor(s)  209 , as discussed further below. 
     The processor  207  can receive raw temperature data from the temperature sensor(s)  209 . Additionally, the processor  207  can receive raw ECG data from the disposable device  203 . For example, the processor  207  can receive raw ECG data from the disposable device  203  via contact between one or more electrical connectors of the reusable portion  205  and one or more electrical connectors of the disposable portion  203 . As another example, the processor  207  can receive raw ECG data from the disposable device  203  via electrical contact between conductive strips  244  of the flexible circuit  225  of the disposable device  203  and conductor pins  253  of the reusable device  206 . After receiving the raw ECG and temperature data, the processor  207  can perform data processing to calculate physiological parameters corresponding to temperature and/or ECG. The physiological parameters can be stored in the memory  208  or transmitted to different sensor systems, patient monitoring systems, and the like. For example, the physiological parameters can be transmitted to the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or the patient monitor  130 . The data stored in the memory  208  can be stored for a predetermined length of time and transmitted to different sensor systems or patient monitoring systems or devices when the ECG device  110  is connected (via a wire or wirelessly) to such other systems or devices. Optionally, the raw temperature data and the raw ECG data can be stored in the memory  208  prior to data processing by the processor  207 . The processor  207  can retrieve raw temperature and/or ECG data periodically to process and/or transmit the raw data in batches. Alternatively, the processor  207  can automatically retrieve (for example, continuously) the raw data from the memory  208  as the memory  208  receives the raw ECG and temperature data. 
       FIG. 2E  illustrates a top, perspective view of the dock  204  of the disposable device  203 . The dock  204  (also referred to herein as “base”) can include a main body  216  and a laminate structure  221 . The main body  216  can include one or more pin supports  219 , one or more pin supports  220 , a wall  255  extending along and/or around an exterior and/or perimeter of the main body  216 , and openings  223  in the wall  255 . The wall  255  can extend along and/or around a portion of the main body  216  and/or can have a height which varies along the length of the wall  255 . 
     The dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  can include one or more mechanical connector portions configured to secure (for example, removably secure) to one or more mechanical connector portions of the hub  206  of the reusable portion  205 . For example, the main body  216  can include one or both of mechanical connector portions  217  and  218 . The mechanical connector portion  217  can be, for example, a clip  217  that can be configured to bend and/or flex. As discussed further below, the clip  217  can include a protrusions  240  that can extend in a direction towards the mechanical connector portion  218  ( FIG. 2H ). The mechanical connector portion  218  can extend outward from a portion of the main body  216 . For example, the mechanical connector portion  218  can extend above a height of the wall  255 . The mechanical connector portion  218  can include one or more protrusions  241  that can extend in a direction towards the mechanical connector portion  217  ( FIG. 2H ). The mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  can assist coupling between the dock  204  and the hub  206 . For example, the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  can engage corresponding mechanical connector portions of the hub  206  to hold the hub  206  in place. For example, as discussed below, the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  can removably secure within grooves  251 ,  252  of the hub  206 . The interaction of the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  and corresponding mechanical connector portions of the hub  206  can advantageously maintain electrical communication between the dock  204  and the hub  206 . The dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  can include one, two, three, or four or more mechanical connector portions and/or the hub  206  can include one, two, three, or four or more mechanical connector portions. 
     The mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  may extend upward from outer edges of the main body  216  and/or adjacent or proximate the wall  255  as shown in  FIG. 2E . The mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  can be positioned opposite from each other ( FIGS. 2E and 2H ). In some variants, the dock  204  includes less than two mechanical connector portions or more than two mechanical connector portions. For example, in some variants, the dock  204  includes only one of mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218 . 
     The pin supports  219 ,  220  of the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  can support and/or operably position a plurality of electrical connectors of the disposable portion  203 . For example, the pin supports  219 ,  220  can support and/or operably position conductive strips  245 ,  244  of the flexible circuit  225  of the dock  204 . The dock  204  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, or ten or more of pin supports  219  and/or  220 . The pin supports  219 ,  220  can extend through openings or slits formed on a top surface of the main body  216 . For example, as discussed below, the main body  216  can include a top frame  224  having one or more slits  236  and a bottom frame  227  which can include the one or more pin supports  219 ,  220 . The one or more pins supports  219 ,  220  can extend from the bottom frame  227  and through the slits  236 ,  237  of the top frame  224  when the main body  216  is assembled. The slits  236 ,  237  formed on the top surface of the main body  216  can be rectangular or substantially rectangular in shape. The pin supports  219 ,  220  can be arcuate and/or can include an upward portion, an apex, and a downward portion. The upward portions of the pin supports  219 ,  220  can extend upward with respect to and/or beyond the top surface of the main body  216  (for example, a top surface of the top frame  224  and/or bottom frame  227 ) at a predetermined angle. The upper portions of the pin supports  219 ,  220  can terminate at the apex, from which the downward portions of the pin supports  219 ,  220  can extend downward towards the top surface of the main body  216  at another predetermined angle. Such configuration of the pin supports  219 ,  220  can allow them to function like springs when downward force is applied to the pin supports  219 ,  220 . Optionally, the pin supports  219 ,  220  may not have the downward portions. The pin supports  219 ,  220  can be flexible and/or resilient. 
     The pin supports  219  can correspond and/or be associated with electrical connectors of the disposable portion  203 . For example, the pin supports  219  can correspond and/or be associated with conductive strips  244  of the flexible circuit  225  (see  FIGS. 2F and 2I ) that carry electrical signals associated with the one or more external electrodes  112  and/or the one or more internal electrodes  211 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 2E , the dock  204  can have six pin supports  219  that operably position and/or support six conductive strips  244  of the flexible circuit  225  which can carry electrical signals from four external electrodes  112  (via cables  114 ) and two internal electrodes  211 . 
     Similar to the pin supports  219 , the pin supports  220  can correspond and/or be associated with electrical connectors of the disposable portion  203 . For example, the pin supports  220  can correspond and/or be associated with conductive strips  245  of the flexible circuit  225  (see  FIGS. 2F and 2I ) that allow transmission of electrical signals and/or information between the dock  204  and the memory  208  of the hub  206 . The flexible circuit  225  can comprise and/or be coupled to a memory (such as an PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM memory) of the disposable portion  203  configured to store information related to the disposable portion  203 . The conductive strips  245  of the flexible circuit  225  can be coupled to such memory. Advantageously, the pin supports  220  can support and/or operably position the conductive strips  245  so that they contact conductor pins of the hub  206  (such as conductive pins  254 ), which can enable the hub  206  to determine whether the dock  204  is an authorized product. 
     As discussed above, the dock  204  can include one or more openings  223  in portions of the main body  216  that are configured to allow portions of the cables  114  to pass into an interior of the dock  204 . For example, as discussed above, the main body  216  can include one or more openings  223  in the wall  255 . The dock  204  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more openings  223 . The openings  223  can be sized and/or shaped to receive portions of the cables  114  coupled to the external electrodes  112 . The openings  223  can be formed on a side of the main body  216 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 2E , the openings  223  can be formed on a front side (or “end”) of the main body  216 . Alternatively, the openings  223  can be formed on different sides or portions of the main body  216 . The number of the openings  223  can correspond to the number of external electrodes  112  coupled to the dock  204  and/or number of cables  114 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 2B , the dock  204  of the disposable device  203  can include four external electrodes  112 . In this regard, the dock  204  can include four openings  223  configured to receive four cables  114  coupled to the four external electrodes  112 . While  FIG. 2E  illustrates four openings  223 , four cables  114 , and four external electrodes  112 , a different number of electrodes  112 , openings  223  and/or cables  114  can be implemented as part of the disposable portion  203 . The openings  223  can be dimensioned to create a tight fit with the cables  114 . Such configuration can be advantageous in allowing the dock  204  to be water-resistant and/or waterproof. Such configuration can also help maintain integrity of connections between the cables  114  and the openings  223 . For example, a tight fit between the openings  223  and portions of the cables  114  can reduce the likelihood that ends of the cables  114  connected to the flexible circuit  225  (for example, to conductive strips  243 ) are disconnected when opposite ends of the cables  114  are pulled, either inadvertently or intentionally. 
       FIGS. 2F and 2G  show exploded perspective views of the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203 . The dock  204  can include a top frame  224 , the flexible circuit  225 , one or more internal electrodes  211 , a bottom frame  227 , and one or more of substrates (also referred to herein as “membranes”)  228 ,  229 ,  230 ,  231 ,  242 , and/or  239  each of which are described further below. Advantageously, the parts illustrated in the  FIGS. 2F and 2G  may be laid on top of each other without folding, resulting in an increased efficiency of manufacturing process of the ECG device  110 . The top and bottom frames  224 ,  227  can together form and/or define the main body  216 , which is discussed above with reference to  FIG. 2E . Further, the top frame  223  can include the wall  255  discussed above. 
     The top frame  224  can be coupled to the bottom frame  227  such that the top frame  224  sits on top of the bottom frame  227 . The top frame  224  can include a recessed portion  235  formed from a top surface of the top frame  224 . The recessed portion  235  can include an aperture  238  (see  FIGS. 2F-2G ) that is formed at a bottom of the recessed portion  235 . 
     The bottom frame  227  can include an aperture  232  and one or more apertures  233 . The aperture  232  of the bottom frame  227  can correspond and/or align with the recessed portion  235  of the top frame  224  such that when the top frame  224  is placed on the bottom frame  227 , the aperture  232  receives the recessed portion  235  and the recessed portion  235  extends through and/or below the aperture  232 . As discussed below, this can advantageously allow a portion of the reusable device  205  and the temperature sensor  209   a  to be positioned closer to the substrate  230 , which can in turn increase thermal communication between a user&#39;s skin and the temperature sensor  209   a.    
     As discussed above, the dock  204  can include the pin supports  219 ,  220 . As shown in  FIG. 2F , the pin supports  219 ,  220  can be formed on the bottom frame  227 . The top frame  224  can include slits  236 ,  237  that can receive the pin supports  219 ,  220  of the bottom frame  227 , respectively. When the top frame  224  is placed on the bottom frame  227 , the pin supports  219 ,  220  can extend through and/or above the slits  236 ,  237  of the top frame  224 . 
     The flexible circuit  225  can be placed and/or positioned between the top frame  224  and the bottom frame  227  (see  FIGS. 2F-2G ). For example, the flexible circuit  225  can be sandwiched between the top and bottom frames  224 ,  227  during assembly. The bottom frame  227  can operably position the flexible circuit  225  and/or portions thereof such that electrical communication between the flexible circuit  225  and a circuit board and/or flexible circuit of the reusable portion  205  is facilitated when the reusable portion  205  is secured to the disposable portion  203 . For example, the pin supports  219  of the bottom frame  227  can operably position conductive strips  244  of the flexible circuit  225  so that the conductive strips  244  contact conductor pins  253  of the reusable portion  205  when the reusable and disposable portions  203 ,  205  are mated. Additionally or alternatively, the pin supports  220  of the bottom frame  227  can operably position conductive strips  245  of the flexible circuit  225  such that the conductive strips  245  contact conductor pins  254  of the reusable portion  205  when the reusable and disposable portions  203 ,  205  are mated. Such contact can advantageously allow the flexible circuit  225  to transmit information and/or physiological data from the disposable device  203  to the reusable device  205 . Additional details of the flexible circuit  225  are provided below. 
     With reference to  FIG. 2F , the internal electrodes  211  can be placed and/or positioned at least partially between the top frame  224  and the bottom frame  227 . The internal electrodes  211  can be removably coupled to the flexible circuit  225 . The internal electrodes  211  can be placed within the apertures  233  and the apertures  233  can be dimensioned to receive the internal electrodes  211  (and/or portions thereof). 
     As discussed above, the dock  204  (also referred to herein as “base”) of the disposable portion  203  can include a laminate structure  221 . For example, the dock  204  can include one or more of substrates  228 ,  229 ,  230 ,  231 ,  242 , and/or  239 . Substrate  228  can comprise foam and can be configured to surround the top and/or bottom frames  224 ,  227  when the dock  204  is assembled. Substrate  228  can include an opening sized and/or shaped to match a size and/or shape of a perimeter of the top and/or bottom frames  224 ,  227  (see  FIGS. 2F-2G ). 
     Substrate  229  can comprise an adhesive material configured to secure the substrate  228  and/or the bottom frame  227  to the substrate  230  and/or substrate  231 . Substrate  229  can be, for example, a double sided adhesive layer. Substrate  229  can include one or more of openings  229   a ,  229   b . Opening  229   a  can be sized and/or shaped to allow the recessed portion  235  and/or the housing  297  to contact a portion of the substrate  230  when the dock  204  is assembled and the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 . Openings  229   b  can be sized and/or shaped to allow the internal electrodes  211  to contact substrates  231 , which are discussed further below. 
     Substrate  230  can be secured (for example, adhered) to substrate  229  as discussed above. As shown, substrate  230  can include apertures  230   a  sized and/or shaped to correspond to a size and/or shape of the internal electrodes  211 . The number of apertures  230   a  can correspond to the number of internal electrodes  211 . The apertures  230   a  can be dimensioned to receive the one or more internal electrodes  211 . As discussed above, the opening  229   a  of substrate  229  can be sized and/or shaped to allow the recessed portion  235  and/or the housing  297  to contact a portion of the substrate  230  when the dock  204  is assembled and the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 . Advantageously, substrate  230  can comprise a thermally conductive material configured to provide thermal communication between the patient&#39;s skin and the housing  297 . As also discussed above, the housing  297  can comprise a thermally conductive material and can house the temperature sensor  209   a . Substrate  230  can comprise an electrically isolative material which can advantageously minimize or eliminate electrical interference between the patient&#39;s skin and portions of the dock  204  in areas other than the apertures  230   a . Substrate  230  can be, for example, a polyethylene (PE) film. 
     The dock  204  can include one or more substrates that provide increased electrical conductivity between the patient&#39;s skin and the internal electrodes  211 . For example, the dock  204  can include one or more substrates  231 , the number of which can correspond with the number of internal electrodes  211 . The substrates  231  can be adhered to substrate  230  (for example, a bottom side of the substrate  230 ). The substrates  231  can be adhered adjacent, proximate, and/or under the apertures  230   a  of substrate  230  such that bottom portions of the internal electrodes  211  contact and/or secure to the substrates  231 . For example, the substrates  231  can be sized and/or shaped to cover the apertures  230   a  when secured to the substrate  230 . The substrates  231  can comprise an adhesive material. The substrates  231  can comprise an electrically conductive material. The substrates  231  can comprise, for example, hydrogel. The substrates  231  can be hydrogel patches. The substrates  231  can have a smaller area than any or all of the other substrates  228 ,  229 ,  230 ,  242 , and/or  239 . 
     Substrate  242  can be a bottommost layer of the dock  204  configured to contact skin of a user when the dock  204  is secured to the user. Substrate  242  can comprise a material configured to secure to skin of a user. For example, substrate  242  can comprise a material configured to allow for removable securement of the dock  204  to the user&#39;s skin. Additionally or alternatively, substrate  242  can be waterproof. Substrate  242  can comprise a silicone adhesive, for example. Substrate  242  can comprise a silicone adhesive coupled with a polyurethane layer. As shown, substrate  242  can include one or more openings  242   a  aligned with the one or more substrates  231 . The one or more openings  242   a  can be sized and/or shaped to receive (for example, at least partially receive) the one or more substrates  231 . Advantageously, the openings  242   a  are spaced from each other, and as such, can separate the substrates  231 . Such separation between substrate  231  is important so that the two internal electrodes  211  (where both are included) are electrically isolated from each other and/or so that the two substrates  231  make independent electrical contact with the patient&#39;s skin. When the dock  204  is assembled and secured to the user&#39;s skin, the one or more openings  242   a  can be positioned with respect to the one or more substrates  231  such that the substrates  231  and portions of the substrate  242   a  around the one or more openings  242   a  contact and/or secure to the skin. 
     Substrate  239  can be a release liner configured to secure to one or more of the above-described substrates and further configured to be removed prior to securement of the dock  204  to a user. Substrate  239  can cover substrates  242  and/or  231 . As shown in  FIGS. 2F-2G , substrate  239  can include a tab  239   a  configured to assist in removing the substrate  239  from one or more of the above-described substrates. 
       FIG. 2H  illustrates a side view of the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203 . As discussed above, the dock  204  can include one or both of mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  which can secure to mechanical connector portions of the hub  206 . The mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  can include protrusions  240 ,  241 , respectively. The protrusions  240 ,  241  can be positioned at free (for example, cantilevered) ends of the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218 , such as ends opposite to ends connected to portions of dock  204  (such as the main body  216 ). The protrusions  240 ,  241  can engage protrusions  251   a ,  252   a  within grooves  251 ,  252  of the hub  206  (see  FIGS. 2J-2K ) to removably secure the hub  206  to the dock  204 . When the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 , the hub  206  can be positioned at least partially between the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218 . The engagement between the protrusions  240 ,  241  and the protrusions  251   a ,  252   a  within the grooves  251 ,  252  can prevent movement of the hub  206  in horizontal and/or vertical directions while mated with the dock  204 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 2H and 2J-2K , the hub  206  can include two protrusions  252   a  spaced from one another within the groove  252 . The protrusions  252   a  can be tapered ( FIG. 2J ). The hub  206  can include a protrusion  251   a  which extends across a width of the groove  252 . The mechanical connector portion  217  can be a clip that is flexible. The mechanical connector portion  217  can have a non-straight cross section ( FIG. 2H ). For example, mechanical connector portion  217  can have an S-shape. As another example, mechanical connector portion  217  can curve in multiple directions from a first end to a second end. Such configuration can advantageously allow the mechanical connector portion  217  to bend without breaking, especially where the mechanical connector portion  217  is made of a rigid plastic material. The mechanical connector portion  217  can have one or more ribs  217   a  on a top plate thereof, which can aid a user in moving (for example, flexing) the mechanical connector portion  217  to disconnect a portion of the hub  206  from the dock  204 . In some implementations, the mechanical connector portion  217  can be similar or identical to the mechanical connector portion  317  discussed elsewhere herein with respect to ECG device  310  and/or dock  304 . 
       FIG. 2I  illustrates a top view of the flexible circuit  225 . The flexible circuit  225  can include numerous conductive surfaces and/or strips. For example, the flexible circuit  225  can include conductor strips  243 ,  244 ,  245 , and/or  246 . The conductor strips  243  can electrically connect to the cables  114  which cane themselves be electrically connected to the external electrodes  112 . In this regard, the conductor strips  243  can receive electrical signals from the external electrodes  112  via the cables  114 . The cables  114  can be soldered to the corresponding conductive strips  243 . The conductor strips  246  (also referred to herein as “conductive rings”) can be formed around and/or within apertures  247 , as shown in  FIG. 2I . The conductive rings  246  can create contact with and receive electrical signals from the internal electrodes  211 . The apertures  247  can receive a top portion of the internal electrodes  211 , creating contact between the conductor strips  246  and the internal electrodes  211  which allows the flexible circuit  225  to receive ECG data from the internal electrodes  211 . 
     The conductor strips  245  can establish electrical communication between the dock  204  and the memory  208  of the reusable device  205 . The conductor strips  245  of the flexible circuit  225  can be positioned adjacent to (for example, on top of) the pin supports  220 . The pin supports  220  supporting the conductor strips  245  can be oriented such that when the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 , conductor pins  254  (see  FIG. 2L-2M ) of the hub  206  contact the conductor strips  245 . The memory  208  of the reusable device  205  can be coupled to the conductor pins  254  such that contact between the conductor strips  245  and the conductor pins  254  allow electrical signals and/or information to be transmitted from the disposable device  203  to the memory  208  of the reusable device  205 . Advantageously, the conductive strips  245  can be utilized to enable verification of whether the disposable portion  203  is an authorized product. For example, when the reusable portion  205  is electronically and/or mechanically mated to the disposable portion  203  such that contact is made between the conductive strips  245  and the conductor pins  254 , the reusable portion  205  can determine whether the disposable portion  203  is an authorized product by analyzing information contained within a memory of the flexible circuit  225  of the disposable portion  203 . As discussed above, the memory of the flexible circuit  225  can be an PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM memory configured to store information related to the disposable portion  203 . Such determination can prevent damage to the reusable device  205  that may occur if an unauthorized product is secured thereto. Such determination can additionally or alternatively ensure proper functionality of the reusable device  205 . 
     In some cases, the memory of the flexible circuit  225  is encoded with information regarding to the disposable portion  203 , for example, how many external and/or internal electrodes  112 ,  211  are included in a particular disposable portion  203 . In such cases, when the reusable portion  205  is electronically and/or mechanically mated to the disposable portion  203  such that contact is made between the conductive strips  245  and the conductor pins  254 , the reusable portion  205  can determine such information and can determine a particular measurement and/or processing scenario to implement. For example, in such cases, after determining how many external and/or internal electrodes  112 ,  211  are included in a particular disposable portion  203 , the processor  207  of the reusable portion  205  can determine that a more or less complex diagnostic and/or physiological assessment should be undertaken with respect to physiological parameters related to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity. 
     The conductor strips  244  can be in electronic communication with the conductor strips  243 ,  246  such that they can receive electrocardiogram data from the external electrodes  112  and the internal electrodes  211 . The conductor strips  244  of the flexible circuit  225  can be positioned on top of the pin supports  219 . The pin supports  219  supporting the conductor strips  244  can be oriented such that when the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 , conductor pins  253  (see  FIG. 2L-2M ) of the hub  206  can contact the conductor strips  244 . The contact between the conductor strips  244  and the conductor pins  253  can allow electrical signals to be transmitted from the disposable device  203  to the processor  207  of the reusable device  205 . The processor  207  of the reusable device  205  can be coupled to the conductor pins  253  to receive the electrical signals from the disposable device  203  via the conductor strips  244 . The number of conductive strips  244  can correspond with the total number of conductive strips  243 ,  246 . Each of one of the conductor strips  243  and conductor strips  246  can be associated with a different one of the conductor strips  244  of the flexible circuit  225 . 
       FIG. 2V  illustrates a top view of a flexible circuit  225 ′. Flexible circuit  225 ′ can be utilized and/or incorporated in ECG device  110  in a similar manner as that described and/or shown elsewhere herein with respect to flexible circuit  225 . Flexible circuit  225 ′ can be similar or identical to flexible circuit  225  in some or many ways. The flexible circuit  225 ′ can include numerous conductive surfaces and/or strips. For example, the flexible circuit  225 ′ can include conductor strips  243 ′,  246 ′. The conductor strips  243 ′ can be electrically connected to the cables  114  which can themselves be electrically connected to the external electrodes  112 . In this regard, the conductor strips  243 ′ can receive electrical signals from the external electrodes  112  via the cables  114 . The cables  114  can be soldered to the corresponding conductive strips  243 ′. The conductor strips  246 ′ (also referred to herein as “conductive rings”) can be formed around and/or within apertures  247 ′ in the flexible circuit  225 ′, as shown in  FIG. 2V . The conductive rings  246 ′ can create contact with and receive electrical signals from the internal electrodes  211 . The apertures  247 ′ can receive a top portion of the internal electrodes  211 , creating contact between the conductor strips  246 ′ and the internal electrodes  211  which allows the flexible circuit  225 ′ to receive ECG data from the internal electrodes  211 . 
     The conductor strips  245 ′ can establish electrical communication between the dock  204  and the memory  208  of the reusable device  205  when the reusable device  205  is coupled with the disposable device  203 . The conductor strips  245 ′ of the flexible circuit  225  can be positioned adjacent to (for example, on top of) the pin supports  220 . The pin supports  220  supporting the conductor strips  245 ′ can be oriented such that when the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 , conductor pins  254  (see  FIG. 2L-2M ) of the hub  206  contact the conductor strips  245 ′. The memory  208  of the reusable device  205  can be coupled to the conductor pins  254  such that contact between the conductor strips  245 ′ and the conductor pins  254  allow electrical signals and/or information to be transmitted from the disposable device  203  to the memory  208  of the reusable device  205 . Advantageously, the conductive strips  245 ′ can be utilized to enable verification of whether the disposable portion  203  is an authorized product. For example, when the reusable portion  205  is electronically and/or mechanically mated to the disposable portion  203  such that contact is made between the conductive strips  245 ′ and the conductor pins  254 , the reusable portion  205  can determine whether the disposable portion  203  is an authorized product by analyzing information contained within a memory of the flexible circuit  225 ′ of the disposable portion  203 . Similar to that discussed above with respect to flexible circuit  225 , such memory of the flexible circuit  225 ′ can be an PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM memory configured to store information related to the disposable portion  203 . Such determination can prevent damage to the reusable device  205  that may occur if an unauthorized product is secured thereto. Such determination can additionally or alternatively ensure proper functionality of the reusable device  205 . 
     In some cases, the memory of the flexible circuit  225 ′ is encoded with information regarding the disposable portion  203 , for example, how many external and/or internal electrodes  112 ,  211  are included in a particular disposable portion  203 . In such cases, when the reusable portion  205  is electronically and/or mechanically mated to the disposable portion  203  such that contact is made between the conductive strips  245 ′ and the conductor pins  254 , the reusable portion  205  can determine such information and can determine a particular measurement and/or processing scenario to implement. For example, in such cases, after determining how many external and/or internal electrodes  112 ,  211  are included in a particular disposable portion  203 , the processor  207  of the reusable portion  205  can determine that a more or less complex diagnostic and/or physiological assessment should be undertaken with respect to physiological parameters related to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity. 
     The conductor strips  244 ′ can be in electronic communication with the conductor strips  243 ′,  246 ′ such that they can receive electrocardiogram data from the external electrodes  112  and the internal electrodes  211 . The conductor strips  244 ′ of the flexible circuit  225 ′ can be positioned on top of the pin supports  219 . The pin supports  219  supporting the conductor strips  244 ′ can be oriented such that when the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 , conductor pins  253  (see  FIG. 2L-2M ) of the hub  206  can contact the conductor strips  244 ′. The contact between the conductor strips  244 ′ and the conductor pins  253  can allow electrical signals to be transmitted from the disposable device  203  to the processor  207  of the reusable device  205 . The processor  207  of the reusable device  205  can be coupled to the conductor pins  253  to receive the electrical signals from the disposable device  203  via the conductor strips  244 . The number of conductive strips  244 ′ can correspond with the total number of conductive strips  243 ′,  246 ′. Each of one of the conductor strips  243 ′ and conductor strips  246 ′ can be associated with a different one of the conductor strips  244 ′ of the flexible circuit  225 ′. 
     With continued reference to  FIG. 2V , flexible circuit  225 ′ can include one or more ground pads  248 ′ (which can also be referred to as “grounding pads”). For example, flexible circuit  225 ′ can include two ground pads  248 ′ as shown. In some implementations, each of the one or more cables  114  that can be included in ECG device  110  includes a first wire that electrically connects to one of the conductive strips  243 ′ and a second wire that electrically connects to one of the ground pads  248 ′. In some implementations such as that illustrated in  FIG. 2V , the flexible circuit  225 ′ has four conductive strips  243 ′. In some implementations, each of the cables  114  includes a first wire that is electrically connected (e.g., soldered) to one of the four conductive strips  243 ′ and a second wire that is electrically connected (e.g., soldered) to one of the ground pads  248 ′. For example, with reference to  FIG. 2W , where the ECG device  110  includes four cables  114 , each of the four cables  114  can include a first wire  114   a  that is electrically connected to a different one of the conductive strips  243 ′. Additionally, each of the four cables  114  can include a second wire  114   b , and the second wire  114   b  of two of the four cables  114  can be electrically connected to a first one of the ground pads  248 ′ and the second wire  114   b  of the other two of the four cables  114  can be electrically connected to a second one of the ground pads  248 ′. As another example, with reference to  FIG. 2X , where the ECG device  110  includes two cables  114 , each of the two cables  114  can include a first wire  114   a  that is electrically connected to a different one of the conductive strips  243 ′, and each of the two cables  114  can include a second wire  114   b  that is electrically connected to different ones of the ground pads  248 ′. 
     As discussed elsewhere herein, the ECG device  110  can include one or more internal ECG electrodes, such as ECG electrodes  211 . As also discussed herein, the internal ECG electrodes  211  can be coupled to a subject (e.g., to skin of the subject), for example, via an adhesive. For example, internal ECG electrodes  211  can be coupled to the subject&#39;s skin via substrate(s)  231  discussed above, and substrate(s)  231  can themselves be secured to the internal ECG electrodes  211 . As also discussed above, substrate(s)  231  can comprise an adhesive and/or electrically conductive material. When ECG device  110  is in use, internal electrode(s)  211  can be can be coupled to skin of the subject while also electrically connected to the flexible circuit  225 ′ (for example, via conductive rings  246 ′). In some cases, it can be difficult for the internal electrode(s)  211  to maintain proper contact with the subject&#39;s skin while coupled with the flexible circuit  225 ′, for example, if portions of the ECG device  110  are moved and/or if the portions of the subject&#39;s skin underlying the electrodes  211  is non-uniform. Advantageously, flexible circuit  225 ′ can be configured to allow internal electrodes  211  to move to conform to the subject&#39;s skin surface while maintaining electrical connection. For example, flexible circuit  225 ′ can include one or more portions that are moveable (for example, flexible and/or rotatable) relative to a remainder portion of the flexible circuit  225 ′ and such one or more moveable portions can be electrically connected to the internal electrodes  211 . As another example, with reference to  FIG. 2V , flexible circuit  225 ′ can include one or more portions  241 ′ that can include the apertures  247 ′ and conductive rings  246 ′ discussed above which can electrically connect to the internal electrodes  211 , and such portions  241 ′ can be movable relative to remainder portion(s) of the flexible circuit  225 ′. Flexible circuit  225 ′ can include one, both, or none of portions  241 ′. Portions  241 ′ can be movable, for example, flexible and/or rotatable with respect to the remainder portion(s) of flexible circuit  225 ′. For example, portions  241 ′ can be flexible and/or rotatable with respect to a plane of the flexible circuit  225 ′ and/or a plane of the remainder portion(s) of flexible circuit  225 ′. Such configurations can advantageously allow the internal electrode(s)  211  to move relative to the remainder portion(s) of the flexible circuit  225 ′ to better conform to a subject&#39;s skin surface while maintaining electrical connection with the flexible circuit  225 ′. This can be especially advantageous where flexible circuit  225 ′ is held and/or otherwise operably positioned by other portions of the ECG device  110  (such as the frame(s)  224 ,  227  and/or pin supports  219 ,  220  of the frame  227 ). 
     With continued reference to  FIG. 2V , such portions  241 ′ can be formed in a variety of ways. For example, portions  241 ′ can be formed via a cut or removal of portions of the flexible circuit  225 ′. As another example, portions  241 ′ can be formed by a cut line  249 ′ (which can be referred to as a “cutaway line” or “slit”). Cut line  249 ′ can extend through the flexible circuit  225 ′ and can extend around a portion of the conductive rings  246 ′ and apertures  247 ′. For example, cut line  249 ′ can extend around about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, or about 90% of a perimeter of the conductive rings  246 ′ and/or apertures  247 ′, or any value or range between any of these values. As shown, the cut line  249 ′ can extend around the conductive ring  246 ′ and aperture  247 ′ between two points  241   a ′,  241   b ′ that are spaced from one another and/or that do not connect with each other. In some implementations, portion  241 ′ is movable relative to a hinge point and/or region formed by a portion of flexible circuit  225 ′ between points  241   a ′,  241   b′.    
       FIG. 2Y  illustrates an alternative implementation of a disposable portion  203 ″. Disposable portion  203 ″ can be utilized as part of ECG device  110 . Disposable portion  203 ″ can be configured to interact with (for example, electronically and mechanically mate with) reusable device  205  in a similar or identical manner as that discussed above with respect to disposable portion  203 .  FIGS. 2Z-2GG  illustrate various views of a dock  204 ″. Dock  204 ″ can be similar to dock  204  discussed above. For example, dock  204 ″ can be configured to interact with (for example, electronically and mechanically mate with) hub  206  in a similar or identical manner as that discussed above with respect to dock  204 . Disposable portion  203 ″ can include one or more external electrodes  112 ″, cable(s)  114 ″, and dock  204 ″. External electrodes  112 ″ and cables  114 ″ can be similar or identical to electrodes  112  and cables  114 , respectively. 
     As mentioned above, dock  204 ″ can be the same in some or many respects to dock  204  as described above. As shown in  FIGS. 2Z-2CC , dock  204 ″ (also referred to herein as “base”) can include a main body  216 ″ and a laminate structure  221 ″. Main body  216 ″ can be similar or identical to main body  216  of dock  204 . For example, main body  216 ″ can include one or more pin supports  219 ″, one or more pin supports  220 ″, a wall  255 ″ extending along and/or around an exterior and/or perimeter of the main body  216 ″, and openings  223 ″ in the wall  255 ″ which can be similar or identical to pin supports  219 , pin supports  220 , wall  255 , and/or openings  223  respectively. Dock  204 ″ can include mechanical connector portions  217 ″,  218 ″ that can be similar or identical to mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  discussed above with respect to dock  204 . Mechanical connector portion  217 ″ can include a protrusion  240 ″ and/or ribs  217   a ″ that can be similar or identical to protrusion  240  and ribs  217   a , respectively, as discussed above. Mechanical connector portion  218 ″ can include protrusion(s)  241 ″ that can be similar or identical to protrusion(s)  241 . 
     Laminate structure  221 ″ can be similar in some respects to laminate structure  221  discussed above, and laminate structure  221 ″ can include one or more substrates, as described further below. In some implementations, laminate structure  221 ′ (which can include one or more substrates configured to secure dock  204 ″ to a user) includes flanges  265 ″ which can help dock  204 ″ maintain securement to skin of the user (for example, by resisting peel-off forces). Flanges  265 ″ can be formed at an end of the laminate structure  221 ′ and/or dock  204 ″ and can extend in opposite directions from one another. Flanges  265 ″ can extend through an entire thickness of laminate structure  221 ″. Flanges  265 ″ can be formed by notches  280 ″ and/or can be disposed on either side of notch  266 ″ located on an end of the laminate structure  221 ″ and/or dock  204 ″. In some implementations, dock  204 ″ includes notches  267 ″ on an opposite end of laminate structure  221 ″ and/or dock  204 ″. 
       FIGS. 2HH-2II  show exploded perspective views of the dock  204 ″ of the disposable portion  203 ″. The dock  204 ″ can include a top frame  224 ″, a flexible circuit  225 ″, one or more internal electrodes  211 ″, a bottom frame  227 ″, and one or more of substrates (which may also be referred to herein as “membranes”)  228 ″,  229 ″,  230 ″,  242 ″, and/or  239 ″. Top frame  224 ″, internal electrode(s)  211 ″, and a bottom frame  227 ″ can be similar or identical to top frame  224 , internal electrodes  211 , and bottom frame  227 , respectively. Dock  204 ″ can include one or more substrates that can be coupled with main body  216 ″ and can be placed adjacent to the user&#39;s skin when the dock  204 ″ is in use, and such substrates can form laminate structure  221 ″. Dock  204 ″ can include one or more substrates that provide increased electrical conductivity between the patient&#39;s skin and the internal electrodes  211 ″. For example, the dock  204 ″ can include substrate  242 ″, which can be a bottommost layer of the dock  204 ″ configured to contact skin of a user when the dock  204 ″ is secured to the user. In some implementations, substrate  242 ″ comprises substrates  242   a ″ and  242   b ″ that are separated from one another by a channel  242   c ″. Such separation between substrates  242   a ″ and  242   b ″ can provide electrical isolation between the two internal electrodes  211 ″ (where both are included) such that the two substrates  242   a ″ and  242   b ″ (and respective internal electrodes  211 ″ coupled thereto) make independent electrical contact with the patient&#39;s skin. In some implementations, channel  242   c ″ substantially straight. In some implementations, channel  242   c ″ comprises a straight portion and a portion that is at least partially curved (for example, comprises a serpentine shape). Substrates  242 ″ can comprise an electrically conductive material. In some implementations, substrates  242 ″ additionally comprises a thermally conductive material. Substrates  242 ″ can comprise hydrogel for example. Substrates  242 ″ can be configured to secure to skin of the user. Dock  204 ″ can include a substrate  228 ′, substrate  229 ″, substrate  230 ″, and/or substrate  239 ″. Substrate  228 ″ can comprise foam and that can be configured to surround the top and/or bottom frames  224 ″,  227 ″ when the dock  204 ″ is assembled. Substrate  228 ″ can include an opening sized and/or shaped to match a size and/or shape of a perimeter of the top and/or bottom frames  224 ″,  227 ″. Substrate  229 ″ can comprise an adhesive material configured to secure the substrate  228 ″ and/or the bottom frame  227 ″ to the substrate  230 ″ and/or substrate  242 ″. Substrate  229 ″ can be, for example, a double sided adhesive layer. Substrate  229 ″ can include one or more of openings  229   a ″,  229   b ″. Opening  229   a ″ can be sized and/or shaped to allow the recessed portion  235 ″ (which can be similar or identical to recessed portion  235 ) and/or the housing  297  of hub  206  to contact a portion of the substrate  230 ″ when the dock  204 ″ is assembled and the hub  206  is mated with the dock  204 ″. Openings  229   b ″ can be sized and/or shaped to allow the internal electrodes  211 ″ to contact substrates  242 ″. 
     Substrate  230 ″ can be secured (for example, adhered) to substrate  229 ″ as discussed above. As shown, substrate  230 ″ can include apertures  230   a ″ sized and/or shaped to correspond to a size and/or shape of the internal electrodes  211 ″. The number of apertures  230   a ″ can correspond to the number of internal electrodes  211 ″. The apertures  230   a ″ can be dimensioned to receive the one or more internal electrodes  211 ″. As discussed above, the opening  229   a ″ of substrate  229 ″ can be sized and/or shaped to allow the recessed portion  235 ″ and/or the housing  297  of hub  206  to contact a portion of the substrate  230 ″ when the dock  204 ″ is assembled and the hub  206 ″ is mated with the dock  204 ″. Advantageously, substrate  230 ″ can comprise a thermally conductive material configured to provide thermal communication between the patient&#39;s skin and the housing  297 . As also discussed above, the housing  297  can comprise a thermally conductive material and can house the temperature sensor  209   a . Substrate  230 ″ can comprise an electrically isolative material which can advantageously minimize or eliminate electrical interference between the patient&#39;s skin and portions of the dock  204 ″ in areas other than the apertures  230   a ″. Substrate  230 ″ can be, for example, a polyethylene (PE) film. 
     Substrate  239 ″ can be a release liner configured to secure to one or more of the above-described substrates and further configured to be removed prior to securement of the dock  204 ″ to a user. Substrate  239 ″ can cover substrates  242 ″ and/or  230 ″. As shown, substrate  239 ″ can include a tab  239   a ″ configured to assist in removing the substrate  239 ″ from one or more of the above-described substrates. 
       FIGS. 2J-2K  illustrate various perspective views of the hub  206  of the reusable portion  205 . The hub  206  can include a cable outlet (also referred to herein as an “output connector port”)  250 , one or more mechanical connector portions, among other components discussed further below. The one or more mechanical connector portions can allow the reusable portion  205  to mate with the disposable portion  203 . The one or more mechanical connector portions can be, for example, grooves  251 ,  252 . The grooves  251 ,  252  can be formed on the same or different side of the hub  206 . For example, as shown in  FIGS. 2J and 2K , the grooves  251 ,  252  can be positioned opposite from each other on opposite ends of the hub  206 . As discussed above, the grooves  251 ,  252  can interact with the protrusions  240 ,  241  of the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218 , respectively, to removably secure the dock  204  and the hub  206 . The grooves  251 ,  252  can be dimensioned and/or shaped to engage the protrusions  240 ,  241 , respectively. As discussed above, the grooves  251 ,  252  can include the protrusions  251   a ,  252   a  that can engage the protrusions  240 ,  241 . In some variants, the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218  can secure to the grooves  251 ,  252  in a snap-fit. 
     The reusable portion  205  can include one or more electrical connectors configured to connect to one or more electrical connectors of the disposable portion  203  when secured thereto. For example, with reference to  FIGS. 2L-2N , the hub  206  can include one or more conductor pins  253 ,  254  disposed proximate to a bottom surface of the hub  206  such that when the hub  206  is coupled with the dock  204 , the conductor pins  253 ,  254  can be in contact with the conductor strips  244 ,  245 , respectively. The contact between the pins  253 ,  254  and the strips  244 ,  245  allows information and/or electrical signals to be transmitted from the disposable device  203  to the reusable device  205 . As discussed above, the contact between the conductor strips  244  and the conductor pins  253  can allow transmission of electrical signals between the dock  204  and the processor  207  of the reusable device  205 . The contact between the conductor strips  245  and the conductor pins  254  can allow transmission of information between the a memory of the dock  204  (for example, a memory of the flexible circuit  225 ) and the memory  208  of the reusable device  205 . 
     The reusable portion  205  can be configured such that, when a bottom of the reusable portion  205  is placed on a flat surface, the conductor pins  253 ,  254  do not contact the flat surface. This can advantageously minimize the risk that the reusable portion  205  or portions thereof will “short” and/or become damaged if high voltage is introduced to the flat surface. For example, if a defibrillator is used on the patient and a bottom of the reusable portion  205  is placed on a surface of the patient, the reusable portion  205  can be configured such that the conductor pins  253 ,  254  are spaced away from the surface. With reference to  FIG. 2L , the hub  206 , for example, a bottom frame  257  of the hub  206 , can include one or more bumps  291 ,  293  protruding outward from a surface of the hub  206 . The one or more bumps  291 ,  293  can include a cavity sized and/or shaped to receive a portion of the conductor pins  253 ,  254 . The number of bumps  291 ,  293  can correspond with the number of conductor pins  253 ,  254 . For example, the hub  206  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more bumps  291  and/or  293 . In some variants, the hub  206  comprises a bump  293  that includes two cavities, each sized and/or shaped to receive a different one of two conductor pins  253 . In some variants, a height of the bumps  291 ,  293  (measured from a bottom surface of the hub  206 ) is greater than a length of extension of the conductor pins  253 ,  254  through the cavities in the bumps  291 ,  293 . This can prevent tips of the conductor pins  253 ,  254  from contacting a surface that the reusable portion  205  is placed upon. Additionally or alternatively, the hub  206  can include one or more stubs  295  extending outward from a bottom surface of the hub  206  (for example, a surface of the bottom frame  257  of the hub  206 ). For example, the hub  206  can include one, two, three, or four or more stubs  295 . As another example, the hub  206  can include two stubs  295  positioned outside a plurality of bumps  291  ( FIGS. 2L-2M ). The one or more stubs  295  can be aligned with one another along a bottom surface of the hub  206 . The one or more stubs  295  can have a height (measured from a bottom surface of the hub  206 ) that is greater than a length of extension of the conductor pins  253 ,  254  beyond the bottom surface of the hub  206 . This can prevent tips of the conductor pins  253 ,  254  from contacting a surface that the reusable portion  205  is placed upon. Additionally or alternatively, as discussed below, the hub  206  can include a housing  297 . The housing  297  can extend beyond the bottom surface of the hub  206  a distance greater than a length of extension of the conductor pins  253 ,  254  beyond the bottom surface of the hub  206 . This can prevent tips of the conductor pins  253 ,  254  from contacting a surface that the reusable portion  205  is placed upon. In some cases, when a bottom of the hub  206  is placed on a surface (such as a flat surface), the one or more stubs  295  and the housing  297  contact the surface and the conductor pins  253 ,  254  do not contact the surface. The housing  297 , stubs  295 , bumps  291 ,  293 , and/or other portions of the hub  206  can comprise a material that minimizes or prevents electrical conductivity. For example, the housing  297 , stubs  295 , bumps  291 ,  293 , and/or other portions of the hub  206  can comprise boron nitride. 
       FIGS. 2O-2P  illustrate exploded perspective views of the hub  206  of the reusable device  205 . The hub  206  (also referred to herein as “cover”) can include a top frame  256  and a bottom frame  257 . The hub  206  can further include one or more resistors  258 , a circuit board  259 , the conductor pins  253 , the conductor pins  254 , one or more of temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d , a housing  297 , a flexible circuit  299 , and a cable outlet  250 . The bumps  291  and/or  293  of the bottom frame  257  can include cavities  263  and/or cavities  264 . The cavities  263 ,  264  can be sized and/or shaped to receive the conductor pins  253  and the conductor pins  254 , respectively. The cavities  263 ,  264  can be dimensioned and sized such that the conductor pins  253 ,  254  create water-resistant seal when received by the cavities  263 ,  264 . 
     The hub  206  can include a recessed portion  261 . The recessed portion  261  can be, for example, formed in the bottom frame  257 . The recessed portion  261  can be recessed from a top surface of the bottom frame  257  ( FIG. 2O ) and can extend outward (for example, below) a bottom surface of the bottom frame  257  ( FIG. 2P ). The recessed portion  261  can include an opening  260  formed at an end or bottom of the recessed portion  261 . The recessed portion  261  can be shaped, dimensioned, and/or positioned relative to the top and/or bottom surfaces of the hub  206  such that the recessed portion  235  of the dock  204  ( FIG. 2F ) can receive the recessed portion  261  when the dock  204  is coupled to hub  206 . As discussed further below, the recessed portion  261  can receive the housing  297  which can house temperature sensor  209   a . As discussed below, the housing  297  can extend through the recessed portion  261  and at least partially through the recessed portion  235  of the dock  204  proximate to openings  258  and/or  232  such that it can contact substrate  230 . 
       FIG. 2Q  illustrates an exploded view of a portion of the assembly shown in  FIGS. 2O-2P . As discussed above, the reusable portion  205  can include one or more temperature sensors  209  that can be used to measure a temperature of the patient&#39;s body (for example, via the skin) and/or an ambient temperature inside or outside the reusable portion  205 . For example, the hub  206  can include a temperature sensor  209   a  and one or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d . As shown, the temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d  can be coupled to the flexible circuit  299  and the flexible circuit  299  can be coupled to the circuit board  259 . Thus, temperature data from one or more of temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d  can be transmitted to the circuit board  259 . Temperature sensor  209   a  can be positioned adjacent and/or proximate to a different side of the circuit board  259  as the temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d . As shown, temperature sensor  209   a  can be coupled to an end portion of the flexible circuit  299 . As also shown, in some implementations, portion(s) of the flexible circuit  299  can wrap around portion(s) of the circuit board  259  (for example, wrap around an edge of the circuit board  259 ). Temperature sensor  209   a  can be configured to be positioned closer to the patient&#39;s skin when the reusable portion  205  is mated with the disposable portion  203 . As discussed above, the hub  206  can include a housing  297 . Housing  297  can be configured to receive temperature sensor  209   a . Temperature sensor  209   a  can be secured to a portion of housing  297  with a pad  269 . Pad  269  can be configured to adhere temperature sensor  209   a  to the portion of the housing. Pad  269  can comprise a thermally conductive material. 
     As discussed elsewhere herein, the housing  297  can extend through portions of the bottom frame  257  and/or the dock  204  of the disposable portion  203  and contact a substrate of the dock which can contact skin of the patient. In such configuration, the housing  297  can provide thermal communication between the skin of the patient and the temperature sensor  209   a  housed within the housing  297 . Housing  297  can comprise a material that provides thermal conductivity but minimizes or prevents electrical conductivity. This can advantageously allow the housing  297  to facilitate thermal communication between the patient&#39;s skin and the temperature sensor  209   a  and simultaneously minimize or eliminate damage and/or interference that may be caused from electrical interference. As an example, the housing  297  can comprise a plastic coated with and/or comprising boron nitride. 
     In addition to temperature sensor  209   a , the reusable portion  205  can include one or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d . The temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d  can be coupled to the flexible circuit  299  and be positioned away from the temperature sensor  209   a . One or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d  can be used to detect a temperature within an interior of the reusable portion  205  (for example, within an interior of the hub  206 ). Such interior of the reusable portion  205  can be defined, for example, by and/or between the top and bottom frames  256 ,  257 . The temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d  can detect a temperature adjacent and/or proximate to the circuit board  259  and/or the resistors  258 , for example. Any or all of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d  can additionally or alternatively detect (and/or be influenced by) temperature outside an interior of the reusable portion  205 , such as environmental ambient temperatures. In some cases, temperature data measured from temperature sensor  209   a  may be influenced by temperatures within the interior of the reusable portion  205 . Advantageously, incorporating temperature sensor  209   a  along with one or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d  can allow the processor  207  more accurately determine core body temperature of the patient. For example, the processor  207  can utilize temperature data from one or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d  in order to adjust temperature data received from the temperature sensor  209   a  in order to more accurately determine a patient&#39;s body temperature. Where the hub  206  includes two or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d , the temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c , and  209   d  can be spaced away from each other in order to collect temperature data at various locations within the interior of the hub  206 . 
     In some implementations, an interior of the reusable portion  205  (e.g., defined by and/or between the top and bottom frames  256 ,  257 ) can be filled with a material such that little or no void space exists in the interior. This can advantageously waterproof the reusable portion  205  (and electronic components therein such as those discussed herein), facilitate a waterproof seal around the perimeter of the top and bottom frames  256 ,  257 , and/or facilitate improved thermal conductivity and/or thermal flow for the temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d . For example, the interior of the reusable portion  205  can be filled with a material such that the void space is less than about 50%, less than about 40%, less than about 30%, less than about 20%, less than about 10%, less than about 5%, or less than about 1%. The material can be thermally conductive. The material can be a low viscosity material. The material can be low pressure molding material. The material can be a hot melt and/or adhesive material. The material can comprise plastic, for example, a thermoplastic hotmelt adhesive material. The material can comprise, for example, polyolefin thermoplastic, polyamide thermoplastic, and/or reactive polyurethane thermoplastic. As another example, the material can be Technomelt® material manufactured by Henkel Corporation. 
     With continued reference to  FIGS. 2O-2P , in some implementations, there is no air gap between temperature sensor  209   a  and the circuit board  259  (for example, a first side or surface of circuit board  259 ) and/or there is no air gap between temperature sensor  209   b  and the circuit board  259  (for example, a second side or surface of circuit board  259 ). For example, the temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b  can be positioned adjacent to opposite surfaces of the circuit board  259 . As another example, an interior of the reusable portion  205  or a portion of the interior can be filled with a material, as discussed above, such that there is no air gap between temperature sensor  209   a  and the circuit board  259  (for example, a first side or surface of circuit board  259 ) and/or there is no air gap between temperature sensor  209   b  and the circuit board  259  (for example, a second side or surface of circuit board  259 ). As shown, the temperature sensor  209   a  and temperature sensor  209   b  can be aligned (for example, vertically aligned) with one another. Such positioning can advantageously establish a thermal flux line that can be useful when analyzing and/or comparing temperature values measured by the temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b  and/or measured based off of signal(s) generated by the temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b.    
     The circuit board  259  can include the processor  207  and the memory  208 . The circuit board  259  can be operatively coupled to the external electrodes  112 , the internal electrodes  211 , and one or more of temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d  in order to receive electrocardiogram data and temperature data. The hub  506  can include one or more resistors  258  coupled to the circuit board  259  and/or the conductor pins  253 . The hub  506  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more resistors  258 . The number of resistors  258  can correspond with the number of conductor pins  253  and/or the total number of external and internal electrodes  112 ,  211 . The resistors  258  can be positioned between the circuit board  259  and the conductor pins  253 . Advantageously, the resistors  258  can prevent or reduce the damage to the circuit board  259  (or other components of the reusable device  205 ) due to shorting or arcing, which may be caused when high voltage is accidentally and/or suddenly introduced via the conductor pins  253 , for example, if the reusable device  205  is positioned on or proximate to a patient when a defibrillator is used. For example, the resistors  258  can be high-capacity, low-resistance resistors that allow electrical signals related to a user&#39;s cardiac electrical activity to pass therethrough but inhibit high voltage from passing to the circuit board  259  and/or other components of the reusable device  205 . The resistors  258  can be soldered directly to the circuit board  259  and/or the conductive pins  253 . With reference to  FIGS. 2O and 2Q , the hub  206  can include one or more walls  268  configured to separate each of the one or more resistors  268 . For example, the hub  206  can include a number of walls  268  that is one less than the number of resistors  258 . The walls  268  can advantageously isolate portions of the resistors  258  from each other. 
     The reusable portion  205  can include a heat sink configured to transfer heat generated by the reusable portion  205  or portions thereof to an ambient environment outside the reusable portion  205 , thereby allowing regulation of a temperature within the reusable portion  205 . For example, with reference to  FIG. 2O , the hub  206  of the reusable portion  205  can include a heat sink  279  positioned at or near a top surface of the hub  206 . Heat sink  279  can advantageously transfer heat generated by one or more of the circuit board  259 , flexible circuit  299 , temperature sensor  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d , resistors  258 , and/or other components, to the ambient environment outside of the hub  206 . Heat sink  279  can be a metal element. 
       FIG. 2R  illustrates a top, perspective view of the hub  206  and the dock  204 , illustrating how the hub  206  and the dock  204  can be coupled (for example, removably coupled). The dock  204  can removably secure to the hub  206  via engagement between the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218 ,  252 ,  251  as discussed above. When the dock  204  and the hub  206  are secured in such manner, the conductor pins  253 ,  254  (see  FIG. 2L-2M ) of the hub  206  can engage the pin supports  219 ,  220 , respectively. As discussed above, the conductive strips  244 ,  245  of the flexible circuit  225  can be supported by the pin supports  219 ,  220 . Accordingly, when the dock  204  and the hub  206  are secured in such manner, the conductive strips  244 ,  245  can contact the conductor pins  253 ,  254  of the hub  206 . The contact between the conductive strips  244 ,  245  and the conductor pins  253 ,  254  can allow electrical signals and/or information to be transmitted from the dock  204  of the disposable device  203  to the hub  206  of the reusable device  205 . Additionally, when the dock  204  and the hub  206  are secured in such manner, the housing  297  ( FIGS. 2L-2M ) and the recessed portion  235  can be aligned ( FIG. 2R ). The recessed portion  235  can be sized and/or shaped to receive the housing  297  and/or the recessed portion  261 . When secured in such manner, the housing  297  can contact one of the substrates of the laminate structure  221  as discussed elsewhere herein. 
       FIG. 2S  illustrates a cross-sectional view of the ECG device  110  placed on a patient, showing relative positions of the temperature sensor  209   a  with respect to a patient&#39;s skin.  FIG. 2S  illustrates, among other things, the circuit board  259 , flexible circuit  299 , the recessed portion  261 , the housing  297 , the pad  269 , temperature sensor  209   a , and one or more of optional temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d . As shown, temperature sensor  209   a  can be secured and/or positioned above the pad  269  and a bottom of the housing  297 . In this regard, the temperature sensor  209   a  can be in indirect contact with the patient&#39;s skin via the pad  269 , housing  297 , and one or more substrates of the dock  204 . 
       FIG. 2T  illustrates a cross-sectional view of the ECG device  110  placed on a patient, showing relative positions of the internal electrode  211  with respect to a patient&#39;s skin.  FIG. 2T  illustrates, among other things, the internal electrode  211 , the flexible circuit  225 , conductive strips  244 , pin supports  219 , conductor pins  253 , and resistors  258 . As shown, when the reusable portion  205  and the disposable portion  203  are mated, the conductors pins  253  can contact and/or depress the pins supports  219 . As also shown, the internal electrodes  211  can be in indirect contact with the skin of the patient. For example, the substrates  231  can be positioned between the internal electrodes  211  and the patient&#39;s skin. As discussed above, substrates patches  231  can facilitate transmission of electrical signals from the patient&#39;s heart to the internal electrodes  211 . 
       FIG. 2R  illustrates a block diagram representing a method  270  of determining patient physiological parameters using the ECG device  110 . At step  271 , the reusable device  205  establishes connection with the disposable device  203 . This can occur when the reusable device is mechanically mated with the disposable device  203 . The connection between the reusable device  205  and the disposable device  203  can be established via contact between the conductive pins  253 ,  254  and the conductive strips  244 ,  245  supported by pin supports  219 ,  220 . The contact between the conductive pins  253 ,  254  and the conductive strips  244 ,  245  can occur when the hub  206  of the reusable device  205  is removably mounted on the dock  204  of the disposable device  203 . At step  272 , the reusable device  205  can provide power to the disposable device  203 . The power provided by the reusable device  205  can power the external and internal electrodes  112 ,  211  to collect electrocardiogram data. In some variants, the disposable portion  203  does not comprise a power source and relies entirely on the reusable device  205  to collect electrocardiogram data. 
     At step  273 , the disposable device  203  receives power from the reusable device  205 . At step  274 , the disposable device  203  uses the one or more external electrodes  112  and/or the one or more internal electrodes  211  to collect raw ECG data from the patient. At step  275 , the raw ECG data collected by the external electrodes  112  and/or the internal electrodes  211  can be transmitted to the reusable device  205 . The raw ECG data can be transmitted via the flexible circuit  225  as discussed above. The raw ECG data can be transmitted from the disposable device  203  to the reusable device  205  automatically or manually upon user input. The raw ECG data can be transmitted continuously or with a predetermined delay. 
     At step  276 , the reusable device  205  can collect raw temperature data. The raw temperature data can be collected by the temperature sensor  209   a . The raw temperature data can be collected simultaneously or non-simultaneously from the raw ECG data. For example, the reusable device  205  can collect the raw temperature data regardless of whether the disposable device is collecting and/or transmitting the raw ECG data. The raw temperature data can be collected from temperature sensor  209   a  simultaneously or non-simultaneously with temperature data collected from one or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d . As discussed above, the processor  207  of the reusable portion  205  can determine a body temperature of the patient based on, at least, a comparison of the temperature data from temperature sensor  209   a  and one or more of temperature sensors  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d.    
     Care providers may be able to configure the ECG device  110  to determine which physiological data to be collected in different circumstances. The ECG device  110  can be configured to collect and process temperature-related physiological data in certain, predetermined situations. For example, the ECG device  110  can be configured to measure temperature of a patient when it detects ECG signals associated with irregular heart activities and/or bodily conditions. For example, the ECG device  110  can be configured to measure temperature of a patient when a variation in ECG signals over a predetermined time period exceeds a threshold value. In another example, the ECG device  110  can be configured to collect ECG data from a patient when a temperature measurement exceeds or falls below a threshold value, which can be indicative of an abnormal condition. Other types information related to different patient parameters and/or conditions can be used to trigger the ECG device  110  to collect ECG and/or temperature data. 
     At step  277 , the reusable device  205  (for example, the processor  207 ) can perform signal processing on the raw ECG and temperature data to determine physiological parameters related to a patient&#39;s heart activity and temperature. At step  278 , the reusable device  205  of the ECG device  110  can transmit the physiological parameters to other patient monitoring systems and/or devices via wires or various wireless communication protocols. 
     In some variants, the ECG device  110  is waterproof or water-resistant. For example, the reusable device  205  and/or the disposable device  203  can be configured such that, when secured to one another, they prevent water from entering into an interior thereof. This can minimize or prevent damage to the reusable device  205  and/or the disposable device  203  and/or components thereof (such as the temperature sensor  209 , the internal electrodes  211 , and/or the circuit board  259 ). 
     Partitioning the ECG device  110  into separable reusable and disposable portions  205 ,  203  provides a number of benefits over traditional ECG devices. For example, such partitioning allows a portion of the ECG device  110  (e.g., the reusable portion  205 ) to be reused after the device  200  after use with a given patient, and allows another portion of the device  200  (e.g., the disposable portion  203 ) to be disposed of after such use. By removably securing to the disposable portion  203  as discussed above, the reusable portion  205  can avoid contacting portions of the patient during use. The disposable portion  203  can secure to the patient and provide a platform by which the reusable portion  205  can attach. Such partitioning allows more expensive and/or vulnerable components, such as the circuit board  259 , flexible circuit  299 , temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d , among others, to be housed within the reusable portion  205  while less expensive and/or more durable components (such as the electrodes  112 , cables  114 , laminate structure  221 , dock  204 , among others) to be part of the disposable portion  203 . Such partitioning can allow the disposable portion  203  to be secured to the patient independently of the reusable portion  205 . This can be advantageous where the reusable portion  205  is connected to other physiological monitoring devices (such as the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or the patient monitor  130  via cable  105 ) and securement of the reusable portion  205  and the disposable portion  203  to the patient simultaneously may be more difficult (for example, because of various cables being present in the patient environment). In such circumstances, such partitioning allows a caregiver to secure the disposable portion  203  (for example, the electrodes  112  and the dock  204 ) to the patient, and subsequent to such securement, the caregiver can secure the reusable portion  205  to the disposable portion  203 . In some variants, the reusable portion  205  weighs more than the disposable portion  203 . In some variants, the disposable portion  203  does not include a processor and/or a power source (e.g., a battery). In some variants, the disposable portion  203  does not collect electrical signals responsive to the patient&#39;s cardiac activity until the reusable portion  205  is secured to the disposable portion  203 . 
     As mentioned elsewhere herein, the reusable portion  205  and the disposable portion  203  of the ECG device  110  can be removably secured to one another. In some implementations, the reusable portion  205  can be removed from the disposable portion  203  while the disposable portion is secured to a subject. Additionally or alternatively, the disposable portion  203  can be configured to remain secured to the subject during and/or after the reusable portion  205  is removed (e.g., decoupled) from the disposable portion  203 . In some implementations, the disposable portion  203  does not include a power source (for example, does not include a battery). In some implementations, the reusable portion  205  is configured to provide power to the disposable portion  203 . In some implementations, the disposable portion  203  does not include a processor. In some implementations, the external and/or internal electrodes  112 ,  211  are configured to output signals responsive to the subject&#39;s cardiac activity only when the disposable portion  203  is coupled with the reusable portion  205 . 
     Although device  110  is referred to herein as an ECG device, the present disclosure contemplates a device that can include any or all of the features described herein with respect to ECG device  110  but that does not include ECG structure and/or functionality. For example, the present disclosure contemplates a device that can be placed and/or secured to a user in a similar or identical manner as that described above with respect to ECG device  110  and includes any or all of the features described herein with respect to ECG device  110  but that does not include any of external electrodes  112 , cables  114 , and internal electrodes  211 . For example, in such configurations, such wearable device can include one or more of the temperature sensors  209   a ,  209   b ,  209   c ,  209   d  and/or motion sensor  210 . In such configurations, such device may include a flexible circuit similar to flexible circuit  225 ,  225 ′ but which does not include the conductive strips  243 ,  243 ,  246 , conductive strips  243 ′,  246 ′, and ground pads  248 ′, or alternatively, such device may include flexible circuit  225 ,  225 ′. 
       FIG. 3A  illustrates another embodiment of an ECG device  310  (also referred to herein as “ECG sensor”). The ECG device  310  can be attached to different parts of the patient  111  such as the patient&#39;s chest, back, arms, legs, neck, head, or other portions of the body of the patient. The ECG device  310  can collect one or more types of patient physiological data and transmit the data to other monitoring systems or devices. The physiological data can be transmitted to other monitoring systems or devices via wires or various wireless communication protocols. For example, as discussed above, the ECG device  310  can interact with the various other physiological devices and/or systems, such as the blood pressure monitors discussed herein (for example, blood pressure monitor  120 ) and/or patient monitor  120 . Accordingly, all parts of the description above with reference to ECG device  110  and  FIGS. 1A-1D  can be applicable to ECG device  310 . 
     The ECG device  310  can have the functional and/or computational capabilities to calculate physiological parameters (for example, heart rate, precise body temperature values, among others) using raw physiological data (for example, raw temperature data, raw ECG data responsive to patient cardiac activity, among others). In this regard, the ECG device  310  can transmit raw, unprocessed electrical signals or physiological data, and/or processed, calculated physiological parameters to other patient monitoring devices and/or systems, such as those discussed elsewhere herein (for example, the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or the patient monitor  130 ). 
     With reference to  FIGS. 3A-3D , the ECG device  310  can include a disposable portion  303  (also referred to herein as “disposable device”) and a reusable portion  305  (also referred to herein as “reusable device”). The disposable portion  303  can include a dock  304  (also referred to herein as a “base”), one or more external electrodes  312 , and one or more cables  314 . The one or more external electrodes  312  can be coupled to the dock  304  via the one or more cables  314 . The one or more external electrodes  312  and/or the cables  314  can be identical to the one or more external electrodes  112  and/or the cables  114  as discussed with respect to ECG device  110  and therefore the discussion above with reference to these component is not repeated for the sake of brevity. 
       FIG. 3C  illustrates a perspective view of the reusable device  305 . The reusable device  305  can include a hub  306  (also referred to herein as “cover”), a cable  105 , and/or a connector  105   a . The hub  306  can transmit electrical signals to other devices and/or systems, including multi-parameter patient monitoring systems (MPMS), via the cable  105  and the connector  105   a . Additionally or alternatively, the hub  306  can wirelessly transmit electrical signals to other devices and/or systems. For example, the hub  306  can include a wireless transmitter or transceiver configured to wirelessly transmit electrical signals (for example, signals related to patient temperature and/or heart activities) using different types of wireless communication technology such as Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi, near-field communication (NFC), and the like. In some variants, the reusable device  205  does not include a cable or a connector. 
     The hub  306  can be of various shapes and/or sizes. For example, as shown in  FIG. 3C , the hub  306  can be rectangular in shape and/or can have rounded edges and/or corners. The hub  306  can be shaped to mate with the dock  304 . For example, the hub  306  can be sized and/or shaped to facilitate mechanical and/or electrical mating with the dock  304 . Additional details regarding the mating of the hub  306  and the dock  304  are described further below. 
       FIG. 3D  illustrates a schematic diagram of the ECG device  310 . As discussed above, the ECG device  310  can include the disposable device  303  and the reusable device  305 . The disposable device  303  can include a dock  304  coupled to one or more external electrodes  312  that detect and transmit electrical signals from the patient  111  through the cables  314 . The dock  304  can receive the electrical signals from the external electrodes  312  (for example, via flexible circuit  325 ) and transmit them to the reusable device  305 . The external electrodes  312  can be placed at various locations relative to where the dock  304  is placed. For example, the dock  304  can be placed proximate, adjacent, and/or above the patient&#39;s heart and the external electrodes  312  can be placed at various locations on the patient&#39;s chest. 
     Similar or identical to the external electrodes  112  of ECG device  110 , the externals electrodes  312  can be color-coordinated and/or include graphics or visualizations that can advantageously aid a caregiver properly position and/or secure the electrodes  312  to portions of a patient&#39;s body so that accurate ECG data is collected. Accordingly, the discussion above with reference to  FIGS. 2A-2B and 4D , and ECG device  110  is equally applicable to the external electrodes  312  of ECG device  310  and is not repeated here for the sake of brevity. 
     The disposable device  303  can include one or more external electrodes  312 . For example, the disposable device  303  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more external electrodes  312 . For example, as illustrated by  FIGS. 3A-3B , the disposable device  303  can include four external electrodes  312 . As another example, the disposable device  303  can include two external electrodes  312 . 
     The dock  304  of the disposable device  303  can include one or more internal electrodes  311 . For example, the dock  304  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more internal electrodes  311 . As another example, as illustrated in  FIGS. 3F-3G , the dock  304  can include two internal electrodes  311 . As another example, the dock  304  can include one internal electrode  311 . 
     The total number of electrodes (including both external and internal electrodes) can be two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, or twelve or more electrodes. For example, the disposable device  303  can include four external electrodes  312 , four cables  314 , and two internal electrodes  311 . In another example, the disposable device  303  can include two external electrodes  312 , two cables  314 , and two internal electrodes  311 . In another example, the disposable device  303  can include two external electrodes  312 , two cables  314 , and one internal electrode  311 . In yet another example, the disposable device  303  can include four external electrodes  312 , four cables  314 , and no internal electrode  311 . In yet another example, the disposable device  303  can include one external electrode  312 , one cable  314 , and one internal electrode  311 . In another example, the disposable device  303  can include two external electrodes  312 , two cables  314 , and no internal electrodes  311 . Various combinations of internal and external electrodes  311 ,  312  are possible without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. The number of external electrodes  312  coupled to the dock  304  of the disposable device  303  and the number of internal electrodes  311  housed within the dock  304  can be varied in various examples of disposable device  303  of the ECG device  310 . 
     As illustrates in  FIG. 3D , the reusable device  305  of the ECG device  310  can include a processor  307 , a memory  308 , a temperature sensor  309 , and/or a motion sensor  310 . The memory  308  can be a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a static random access memory (SRAM), or a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), and the like. The memory  308  can store various types of physiological data (raw and/or processed) related to the patient  111 . For example, the memory  308  can store raw and/or processed physiological data related to patient temperature and electrical activity of the heart. The data related to the electrical activity of the heart can represent rhythm and/or activity of the heart. As discussed further below, the memory  308  can be utilized in combination with a memory on the disposable device  303  to enable, among other things, verification of whether the disposable device  303  is an authorized product. For example, the disposable device  303  can include a PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM that can be read by the reusable portion  305  to enable the reusable portion  305  to verify whether the disposable device  303  is an authorized product. 
     As discussed above, the reusable device  305  can include a motion sensor  310 . The motion sensor  310  can be identical to the motion sensor  210  of ECG device  110 . Accordingly, the discussion above with reference to motion sensor  110  of ECG device  110  is equally applicable to the motion sensor  310  of ECG device  310  and is not repeated here for the sake of brevity. 
     As discussed above, the reusable device  305  can include a temperature sensor  309 . The temperature sensor  309  can measure temperature of the patient  111  at and/or proximate to a location where the ECG device  310  is placed. The temperature sensor  309  can measure temperature of the skin of the patient  111 . Additionally or alternatively, the temperature sensor  309  can measure ambient temperature, for example, temperatures outside the reusable device  305  and/or temperatures inside the reusable device  305  (such as at or near a circuit board of the reusable device  305 ). The temperature data collected from the patient  111  by the temperature sensor  309  may be used to determine a core body temperature of the patient  111 . The temperature sensor  309  can be in electronic communication with the processor  307  and can transmit the temperature data to the processor  307 . In one example, the temperature sensor  309  can be an infrared temperature sensor. Placement and/or arrangement of the temperature sensor  309  within the reusable device  305  and/or with respect to the disposable device  303  can be varied to facilitate thermal communication between a user&#39;s skin and the temperature sensor  309 , as discussed further below. 
     The processor  307  can receive raw temperature data from the temperature sensor(s)  309 . Additionally, the processor  307  can receive raw ECG data from the disposable device  303 . For example, the processor  307  can receive raw ECG data from the disposable device  303  via contact between one or more electrical connectors of the reusable portion  305  and one or more electrical connectors of the disposable portion  303 . As another example, the processor  307  can receive raw ECG data from the disposable device  303  via electrical contact between conductive strips  344  of the flexible circuit  325  of the disposable device  303  and conductor pins  353  of the reusable device  305 . After receiving the raw ECG and temperature data, the processor  307  can perform data processing to calculate physiological parameters corresponding to temperature and/or ECG. The physiological parameters can be stored in the memory  308  or transmitted to different sensor systems, patient monitoring systems, and the like. For example, the physiological parameters can be transmitted to the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or the patient monitor  130 . The data stored in the memory  308  can be stored for a predetermined length of time and transmitted to different sensor systems or patient monitoring systems or devices when the ECG device  310  is connected (via a wire or wirelessly) to such other systems or devices. Optionally, the raw temperature data and the raw ECG data can be stored in the memory  308  prior to data processing by the processor  307 . The processor  307  can retrieve raw temperature and/or ECG data periodically to process and/or transmit the raw data in batches. Alternatively, the processor  307  can automatically retrieve (for example, continuously) the raw data from the memory  308  as the memory  308  receives the raw ECG and temperature data. 
       FIG. 3E  illustrates a top, perspective view of the dock  304  of the disposable device  303 . The dock  304  (also referred to herein as “base”) can include a main body  316  and a laminate structure  321 . The main body  316  can include one or more pin supports  319 , one or more pin supports  320 , a wall  355  extending along and/or around an exterior and/or perimeter of the main body  316 , and openings  323  in the wall  355 . The wall  355  can extend along and/or around a portion of the main body  316  and/or can have a height which varies along the length of the wall  355 . 
     The dock  304  of the disposable portion  303  can include one or more mechanical connector portions configured to secure (for example, removably secure) to one or more mechanical connector portions of the hub  306  of the reusable portion  305 . For example, the main body  316  can include one or both of mechanical connector portions  317  and  318 . The mechanical connector portion  317  can be, for example, a clip that can be configured to bend and/or flex. As discussed further below, the clip  317  can include a protrusions  340  that can extend in a direction towards the mechanical connector portion  318  ( FIG. 3H ). The mechanical connector portion  318  can extend outward from a portion of the main body  316 . For example, the mechanical connector portion  318  can extend above a height of the wall  355 . The mechanical connector portion  318  can include one or more protrusions  341  that can extend in a direction towards the mechanical connector portion  317  ( FIG. 3H ). The mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  can assist coupling between the dock  304  and the hub  306 . For example, the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  can engage corresponding mechanical connector portions of the hub  306  to hold the hub  306  in place. For example, as discussed below, the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  can removably secure within grooves  351 ,  352  of the hub  306 . The interaction of the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  and corresponding mechanical connector portions of the hub  306  can advantageously maintain electrical communication between the dock  304  and the hub  306 . The dock  304  of the disposable portion  303  can include one, two, three, or four or more mechanical connector portions and/or the hub  306  can include one, two, three, or four or more mechanical connector portions. 
     The mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  may extend upward from outer edges of the main body  316  and/or adjacent or proximate the wall  355  as shown in  FIG. 3E . The mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  can be positioned opposite from each other ( FIGS. 3E and 3H ). In some variants, the dock  304  includes less than two mechanical connector portions or more than two mechanical connector portions. For example, in some variants, the dock  304  includes only one of mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318 . 
     The pin supports  319 ,  320  of the dock  304  of the disposable portion  303  can support and/or operably position a plurality of electrical connectors of the disposable portion  303 . For example, the pin supports  319 ,  320  can support and/or operably position conductive strips  344 ,  345  of the flexible circuit  325  of the dock  304 . The pin supports  319 ,  320  can extend through openings or slits formed on a top surface of the main body  316 . For example, as discussed below, the main body  316  can comprise a top frame  324  having one or more slits  336  and/or opening  337  and a bottom frame  327  which can include the one or more pin supports  319 ,  320 . The one or more pins supports  319 ,  320  can extend from the bottom frame  327  and through the slits  336  and opening  337  (respectively) of the top frame  324  when the main body  316  is assembled. The slits  336  and/or opening  337  formed on the top surface of the main body  316  can be rectangular or substantially rectangular in shape. The pin supports  319 ,  320  can be arcuate and/or can include an upward portion, an apex, and a downward portion. The upward portions of the pin supports  319 ,  320  can extend upward with respect to and/or beyond the top surface of the main body  316  (for example, a top surface of the top frame  324  and/or bottom frame  327 ) at a predetermined angle. The upper portions of the pin supports  319 ,  320  can terminate at the apex, from which the downward portions of the pin supports  319 ,  320  can extend downward towards the top surface of the main body  316  at another predetermined angle. Such configuration of the pin supports  319 ,  320  can allow them to function like springs when downward force is applied to the pin supports  319 ,  320 . Optionally, the pin supports  319 ,  320  may not have the downward portions. The pins supports  319 ,  320  can be flexible and/or resilient. 
     The pin supports  319  can correspond and/or be associated with electrical connectors of the disposable portion  303 . For example, the pin supports  319  can correspond and/or be associated with conductive strips  344  of the flexible circuit  325  (see  FIGS. 3F and 3I ) that carry electronic signals associated with the one or more external electrodes  312  and/or the one or more internal electrodes  311 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 3E , the dock  304  can have six support pins  319  that support six conductive strips  344  of the flexible circuit  325 , which can carry electronic signals from four external electrodes  312  (via cables  314 ) and two internal electrodes  311 . 
     Similar to the pin supports  319 , the pin supports  320  can correspond and/or be associated with electrical connectors of the disposable portion  303 . For example, the pin supports  320  can correspond and/or be associated with conductive strips  345  of the flexible circuit  325  (see  FIGS. 3F and 3I ) that allow transmission of electronic signals and/or information between the dock  304  and the memory  308  of the hub  306 . The flexible circuit  325  can comprise and/or be coupled to a memory (such as an PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM memory) of the disposable portion  303  configured to store information related to the disposable portion  303 . The conductive strips  345  of the flexible circuit  325  can be coupled to such memory. Advantageously, the pin supports  320  can support and/or operably position the conductive strips  345  so that they contact conductor pins of the hub  306  (such as conductive pins  354 ), which can enable the hub  306  to determine whether the dock  304  is an authorized product. 
     As discussed above, the dock  304  can include one or more openings  323  in portions of the main body  316  that are configured to allow portions of the cables  314  to pass into an interior of the dock  304 . For example, as discussed above, the main body  316  can include one or more openings  323  in the wall  355 . The dock  304  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more openings  323 . The openings  323  can be sized and/or shaped to receive portions of the cables  314  coupled to the external electrodes  312 . The openings  323  can be formed on a side of the main body  316 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 3E , the openings  323  can be formed on a front side (or “end”) of the main body  316 . Alternatively, the openings  323  can be formed on different sides or portions of the main body  316 . The number of the openings  323  can correspond to the number of external electrodes  312  coupled to the dock  304  and/or number of cables  314 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 3B , the dock  304  of the disposable device  303  can include four external electrodes  312 . In this regard, the dock  304  can include four openings  323  configured to receive four cables  314  coupled to four external electrodes  312 . While  FIG. 2E  illustrates four openings  323 , four cables  314 , and four external electrodes  312 , a different number of electrodes  312 , openings  323  and/or cables  314  can be implemented into the disposable portion  303 . The openings  323  can be dimensioned to create a tight fit with the cables  314 . Such configuration can be advantageous in allowing the dock  304  to be water-resistant and/or waterproof. Additionally or alternatively, such configuration can help maintain integrity of connections between the cables  314  and the openings  323 . For example, a tight fit between the openings  323  and portions of the cables  314  can reduce the likelihood that ends of the cables  314  connected to the flexible circuit  325  (for example, to conductive strips  343 ) are disconnected when opposite ends of the cables  314  are pulled, either inadvertently or intentionally. 
       FIGS. 3F and 3G  show exploded perspective views of the dock  304  of the disposable portion  303 . The dock  304  can include a top frame  324 , the flexible circuit  325 , the one or more internal electrodes  311 , a substrate  328 , a substrate  329 , a bottom frame  327 , one or more adhesives  322 , a substrate  330 , and a substrate  331 . Advantageously, the parts illustrated in the  FIGS. 3F and 3G  may be laid on top of each other without folding, resulting in an increased efficiency of manufacturing process of the ECG device  310 . The top and bottom frames  324 ,  327  can together form and/or define the main body  316 , which is discussed above with reference to  FIG. 3E . Further, the top frame  324  can include the wall  355  also discussed above. 
     The top frame  324  can be coupled to the bottom frame  327  such that the top frame  324  sits on top of the bottom frame  327 . The top frame  324  can include a recessed portion  335  formed on a top surface of the top frame  324 . The recessed portion  335  can include an aperture  338  (see  FIGS. 3F-3G ) that is formed at the bottom portion of the recessed portion  335 . 
     The bottom frame  327  can include an aperture  332  and one or more apertures  333 . The aperture  332  of the bottom frame  327  can correspond and/or align with the recessed portion  335  of the top frame  324  such that when the top frame  324  is placed on the bottom frame  327 , the aperture  332  receives the recessed portion  335  and the recessed portion  335  extends through and/or below the aperture  332 . As discussed below, this can advantageously allow a portion of the reusable portion  305  and the temperature sensor  309  to be positioned closer to the substrates  330  and/or  331 , which can in turn increase thermal communication between a user&#39;s skin and the temperature sensor  309 . 
     As discussed above, the dock  304  can include the pin supports  319 ,  320 . As shown in  FIG. 3F , the pin supports  319 ,  320  can be formed on the bottom frame  327 . The top frame  324  can include slits  336  and/or opening  337  that can receive the pin supports  319 ,  320  of the bottom frame  327 , respectively. When the top frame  324  is placed on top of the bottom frame  327 , the pin supports  319 ,  320  can extend through and/or above the slits  336  and/or opening  337  of the top frame  324 . 
     The flexible circuit  325  can be placed and/or positioned between the top frame  324  and the bottom frame  327  (see  FIGS. 3F-3G ). For example, the flexible circuit  325  can be sandwiched between the top and bottom frames  324 ,  327  during assembly. The bottom frame  327  can operably position the flexible circuit  325  and/or portions thereof such that electrical communication between the flexible circuit  325  and a circuit board or flexible circuit of the reusable portion  305  is facilitated when the reusable portion  305  is secured to the disposable portion  303 . For example, the pin supports  319  of the bottom frame  327  can operably position conductive strips  344  of the flexible circuit  325  so that the conductive strips  344  contact conductor pins  353  of the reusable portion  305 . Additionally or alternatively, the pin supports  320  of the bottom frame  327  can operably position conductive strips  345  of the flexible circuit  325  such that the conductive strips  345  contact conductor pins  354  of the reusable portion  205  when the reusable portion  205  is mated with the disposable portion  303 . Such contact can allow the flexible circuit  325  to transmit information and/or physiological data between the disposable device  303  and the reusable device  305 . Additional details of the flexible circuit  325  are provided below. 
     With reference to  FIG. 3F , the internal electrodes  311  can be placed and/or positioned at least partially between the top frame  324  and the bottom frame  327 . The internal electrodes  311  can be removably coupled to the flexible circuit  325 . The internal electrodes  311  can be placed within the apertures  333  and the apertures  333  can be dimensioned to receive the internal electrodes  311  (and/or portions thereof). 
     As discussed above, the dock  304  of the disposable portion  303  can include a laminate structure  321 . As also discussed, the laminate structure  321  can include one or more substrates, such as substrates  328 ,  329 ,  330 , and/or  331 . Substrate  328  can be, for example, a foam membrane or ring configured to surround the top and/or bottom frames  324 ,  327  when the dock  304  is assembled. Substrate  328  can include an opening sized and/or shaped to match a size and/or shape of a perimeter of the top and/or bottom frames  324 ,  327  (see  FIGS. 3F-3G ). Substrates  329 ,  330 ,  331  can be made of a material that that can provide thermal and/or electrical isolation or alternatively, conductivity. Substrates  328 ,  329 ,  330 ,  331  can be made of different materials or the same material. Substrates  329  and/or  330  can be, for example, polyethylene (PE) film. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 3F-3G , the adhesives  322  can be affixed to a bottom surface of the bottom frame  327  to adhere the bottom frame  327  to the substrate  330 . The substrate  330  can be adhered to the substrate  331 . One or more apertures  334  can be formed on the substrate  330 . The substrate  330  can include one, two, three, or four or more apertures  334 . The number of apertures  334  can correspond to the number of internal electrodes  311 . The apertures  334  can be dimensioned to receive the one or more internal electrodes  311 . The substrate  330  can provide electrical isolation between the dock  304  and the patient  111 , for example, in areas outside and/or around the apertures  334 . The apertures  334  can allow the internal electrodes  311  to collect raw ECG data without electrical impedance or isolation provided by the substrate  330 . 
     Substrate  331  can provide thermal and/or electrical conductivity between the dock  304  and the patient  11 . Substrate  331  can be the only substrate between the internal electrodes  311  and the patient  11 . The apertures  333  of the bottom frame  327  and apertures  334  of the substrate  330  can advantageously allow the internal electrodes  311  to measure electrocardiogram data from the patient  111  without any unnecessary electrical resistance and/or impedance. The substrate  331  can comprise hydrogel, for example. 
       FIG. 3H  illustrates a side view of the dock  304  of the disposable portion  303 . As discussed above, the dock  304  can include one or both of mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318 . The mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  can include protrusions  340 ,  341 , respectively. The protrusions  340 ,  341  can be positioned at free (for example, cantilevered) ends of the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318 , such as ends opposite to ends connected to portions of dock  304  (such as the main body  316 ). The protrusions  340 ,  341  can engage the grooves  352 ,  351  of the hub  306  (see  FIGS. 3J-3K ) to removably secure the hub  306  to the dock  304 . When the hub  306  is mated with the dock  304 , the hub  306  can be positioned at least partially between the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318 . The engagement between the protrusions  340 ,  341  and the grooves  352 ,  351  can prevent movement of the hub  306  in horizontal and/or vertical directions while mated with the dock  304 . 
       FIG. 3I  illustrates a top view of the flexible circuit  325 . The flexible circuit  325  can include numerous conductive surfaces and/or strips. For example, the flexible circuit  325  can include conductor strips  343 ,  344 ,  345 , and/or  346 . The conductor strips  343  can electrically connect to the cables  314  which can themselves be electrically connected to the external electrodes  312 . In this regard, the conductor strips  343  can receive electrical signals from the external electrodes  312  via the cables  314 . The cables  314  can be soldered to the corresponding conductive strips  343 . The conductor strips  346  (also referred to herein as “conductive rings”) can be formed around and/or within apertures  347 , as shown in  FIG. 3I . The conductive rings  346  can create contact with and receive electrical signals from the internal electrodes  311 . The apertures  347  can receive a top portion of the internal electrodes  311 , creating contact between the conductor strips  346  and the internal electrodes  311  which allows the flexible circuit  325  to receive ECG data from the internal electrodes  311 . 
     The conductor strips  345  can establish electrical communication between the dock  304  and the memory  308  of the reusable device  305 . The conductor strips  345  of the flexible circuit  325  can be positioned adjacent to (for example, on top of) the pin supports  320 . The pin supports  320  supporting the conductor strips  345  can be oriented such that when the hub  306  is mated with the dock  304 , conductor pins  354  (see  FIG. 3L ) of the hub  306  contact the conductor strips  345 . The memory  308  of the reusable device  305  can be coupled to the conductor pins  354  such that contact between the conductor strips  345  and the conductor pins  354  allow electronic signals and/or information to be transmitted from the disposable device  303  to the memory  308  of the reusable device  305 . Advantageously, the conductive strips  345  can be utilized to enable verification of whether the disposable portion  303  is an authorized product. For example, when the reusable portion  205  is electronically and/or mechanically mated to the disposable portion  303  such that contact is made between the conductive strips  345  and the conductor pins  354 , the reusable portion  205  can determine whether the disposable portion  303  is an authorized product by analyzing information contained within a memory of the flexible circuit  325  of the disposable portion  303 . As discussed above, the memory of the flexible circuit  325  can be an PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, SRAM, and/or DRAM memory configured to store information related to the disposable portion  303 . Such determination can prevent damage to the reusable device  305  that may occur if an unauthorized product is secured thereto. Such determination can additionally or alternatively ensure proper functionality of the reusable device  305 . 
     The conductor strips  344  can be in electronic communication with the conductor strips  343 ,  346  such that they can receive electrocardiogram data from the external electrodes  312  and the internal electrodes  311 . The conductor strips  344  of the flexible circuit  325  can be positioned on top of the pin supports  319 . The pin supports  319  supporting the conductor strips  344  can be oriented such that when the hub  306  is mated with the dock  304 , conductor pins  353  (see  FIG. 3L ) of the hub  306  can contact the conductor strips  344 . The contact between the conductor strips  344  and the conductor pins  353  can allow electronic signals to be transmitted from the disposable device  303  to the processor  307  of the reusable device  305 . The processor  307  of the reusable device  305  can be coupled to the conductor pins  353  to receive the electronic signals from the disposable device  303  via the conductor strips  344 . The number of conductive strips  344  can correspond with the total number of conductive strips  343 ,  346 . Each of one of the conductor strips  343  and conductor strips  346  can be associated with a different one of the conductor strips  344  of the flexible circuit  325 . 
       FIGS. 3J-3L  illustrate various perspective views of the hub  306  of the reusable portion  205 . As shown, the hub  306  can include a cable outlet (also referred to herein as an “output connector port”)  350 , one or more mechanical connector portions, among other components discussed further below. The one or more mechanical connector portions can allow the reusable portion  305  to mate with the disposable portion  303 . The one or more mechanical connector portions can be, for example, grooves  351 ,  352 . The grooves  351 ,  352 , the conductor pins  353 ,  354 , and the temperature sensor  309 . The grooves  351 ,  352  can be formed on the same or different side of the hub  306 . For example, as shown in  FIGS. 3J and 3K , the grooves  351 ,  352  can be positioned opposite from each other on opposite ends of the hub  306 . As discussed above, the grooves  351 ,  352  can interact with the protrusions  340 ,  341  of the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318 , respectively, to removably secure the dock  304  and the hub  306 . The grooves  351 ,  352  can be dimensioned and/or shaped to engage the protrusions  340 ,  341 , respectively. For example, the mechanical connector portions  317 ,  318  can snap towards and/or within the grooves  351 ,  352  to cause the protrusions  340 ,  341  to engage with the grooves  351 ,  352 . 
     The reusable portion  305  can include one or more electrical connectors configured to connect to one or more electrical connectors of the disposable portion  303  when secured thereto. For example, with reference to  FIG. 3L , the hub  306  can include one or more conductor pins  353 ,  354  disposed proximate to a bottom surface of the hub  306  such that when the hub  306  is coupled with the dock  304 , the conductor pins  353 ,  354  can be in contact with the conductor strips  344 ,  345 , respectively. The contact between the pins  353 ,  354  and the strips  344 ,  345  allows information and/or electrical signals to be transmitted from the disposable portion  303  to the reusable portion  305 . As discussed above, the contact between the conductor strips  344  and the conductor pins  353  can allow transmission of electrical signals between the dock  304  and the processor  307  of the reusable portion  305 . The contact between the conductor strips  345  and the conductor pins  354  can allow transmission of information between the a memory of the dock  304  (for example, a memory of the flexible circuit  325 ) and the memory  308  of the reusable portion  305 . 
     The hub  306  can include a recessed portion  361 . The recessed portion  361  can be, for example, formed in the bottom frame  357 . The recessed portion  361  can be recessed from a top surface of the bottom frame  357  ( FIGS. 3L and 3N ) and can extend outward (for example, below) a bottom surface of the bottom frame  357 . The recessed portion  361  can include an opening  360  formed at an end or bottom of the recessed portion  361 . The recessed portion  361  can be shaped, dimensioned, and/or positioned on the bottom surface of the hub  306  such that the recessed portion  335  of the dock  304  ( FIG. 3E ) can receive the recessed portion  361  when the dock  304  is coupled to hub  306 . The recessed portion  361  can receive and/or house the temperature sensor  309 . The temperature sensor  309  can be positioned at a predetermined distance from a bottom portion of the recessed portion  361  and/or the opening  360 . As discussed below, the recessed portion  361  can extend through an opening in the dock  304  and can contact the substrate  330  and/or  331 . The recessed portion  361  of the dock  304  can comprise a material that provides thermal conductivity but minimizes or prevents electrical conductivity. This can advantageously allow the recessed portion  361  to facilitate thermal communication between the patient&#39;s skin and the temperature sensor  309  and simultaneously minimize or eliminate damage and/or interference that may be caused from electrical interference. As an example, the recessed portion  361  can comprise a plastic coated with and/or comprising boron nitride. 
       FIGS. 3M and 3N  illustrate various exploded, perspective views of the hub  306  of the reusable device  305 . The hub  306  (also referred to herein as “cover”) can include a top frame  356  and a bottom frame  357 . The hub  306  can further include one or more resistors  358 , a circuit board  359 , the conductor pins  353 , the conductor pins  354 , the temperature sensor  309 , and the cable outlet  350 . The bottom frame  357  can include apertures  363  and/or apertures  364  (also referred to herein as “cavities”). The apertures  363 ,  364  can extend through the bottom frame  357  and receive the conductor pins  353  and the conductor pins  354 , respectively. The apertures  363 ,  364  can be dimensioned and sized such that the conductor pins  353 ,  354  create water-resistant seal when received by the apertures  363 ,  364 . 
     The circuit board  359  can include the processor  307  and the memory  308 . The circuit board  359  can be operatively coupled to the external electrodes  312 , the internal electrodes  311 , and the temperature sensor  309  in order to receive electrocardiogram data and temperature data. The hub  506  can include one or more resistors  358  coupled to the circuit board  359  and/or the conductor pins  353 . The hub  506  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more resistors  358 . The number of resistors  358  can correspond with the number of conductor pins  353  and/or the total number of external and internal electrodes  312 ,  311 . The resistors  358  can be positioned between the circuit board  359  and the conductor pins  353 . Advantageously, the resistors  358  can prevent or reduce the damage to the circuit board  359  (or other components of the reusable device  305 ) due to shorting or arcing, which may be caused when high voltage is accidentally and/or suddenly introduced via the conductor pins  353 , for example, if the reusable device  305  is positioned on or proximate to a patient when a defibrillator is used. For example, the resistors  358  can be high-capacity, low-resistance resistors that allow electronic signals related to a user&#39;s cardiac electrical activity to pass therethrough but inhibit high voltage from passing to the circuit board  359  and/or other components of the reusable device  305 . The resistors  358  can be soldered directly to the circuit board  359  and/or the conductive pins  353 . As shown in  FIG. 3M , the hub  306  can include one or more walls  368  configured to separate each of the one or more resistors  368 . 
     The reusable portion  306  can be filled with a material in a similar or identical manner as discussed above with reference to reusable portion  205 , therefore, such discussion above is equally applicable to reusable portion  306  and not repeated here for the sake of brevity. Additionally, in some implementations, there is no air gap between the temperature sensor  309  and the circuit board  359  such as is described above with reference to temperature sensor  209   a  in reusable portion  205 , and accordingly, such discussion is equally applicable for reusable portion  309 . 
       FIG. 3O  illustrates a top, perspective view of the hub  306  and the dock  304 , illustrating how the hub  306  and the dock  304  can be coupled (for example, removably coupled). The dock  304  can removably secure to the hub  306  via engagement between the mechanical connector portions  217 ,  218 ,  252 ,  251  as discussed above. When the dock  304  and the hub  306  are secured in such manner, the conductor pins  353 ,  354  (see  FIG. 2L ) of the hub  306  can engage the pin supports  319 ,  320  (see  FIG. 3E ), respectively. As discussed above, the conductive strips  344 ,  345  of the flexible circuit  325  can be supported by the pin supports  319 ,  320 . Accordingly, when the dock  304  and the hub  306  are secured in such manner, the conductive strips  344 ,  345  can contact the conductor pins  353 ,  354  of the hub  306 . The contact between the conductive strips  344 ,  345  and the conductor pins  353 ,  354  can allow electronic signals and/or information to be transmitted from the dock  304  of the disposable device  303  to the hub  306  of the reusable device  305 . Additionally, when the dock  304  and the hub  306  are secured in such manner, the recessed portion  335  and the recessed portion  361  can be aligned (see  FIGS. 3N-3O ). The recessed portion  335  can be sized and/or shaped to receive the recessed portion  361 . The aperture  360  of the recessed portion  361  (see  FIG. 3N ) and the aperture  338  of the recessed portion  335  (see  FIG. 3F-3G ) can be aligned such that the apertures  360 ,  338  define an open space and/or area below the temperature sensor  309 . In such configuration, the recessed portion  261  can contact the substrate  334  when the reusable and disposable portions  305 ,  303  are mated. The apertures  338 ,  360  can be vertically aligned, for example. 
       FIGS. 3P and 3Q  illustrate cross-sectional views of the ECG device  310  placed on a patient&#39;s skin, showing relative positions of the temperature sensor  309  and an internal electrode  311 , respectively, with respect to a patient&#39;s skin. 
     The temperature sensor  309  can be positioned a distance D 1  away from an outer surface of a patient&#39;s skin. The distance D 1  can be equal to the distance between the bottom-most portion of the temperature sensor  309  and a bottom surface of the substrate  331 , for example. In this regard, the temperature sensor  309  may not be in direct contact with the skin of the patient. The aperture  360  of the recessed portion  361  (see  FIG. 3N ) and the aperture  338  of the recessed portion  335  can allow the temperature sensor  309  to collect temperature data from the patient. 
     With reference to  FIG. 3Q , the internal electrodes  311  can be positioned a distance D 2  away from the outer surface of the patient&#39;s skin. The distance D 2  can be equal to the distance between the bottom-most portion of the internal electrodes  311  and the bottom surface of the substrate  331 . In this regard, the internal electrodes  311  may not be in direct contact with the skin of the patient. For example, the substrate  331  can be positioned between the internal electrodes  311  and the patient&#39;s skin. Substrate  331  can comprise an electrically conductive material that facilitates transmission of electrical signals from the patient&#39;s heart to the internal electrodes  311 . The laminate structure  221  can include a release liner similar or identical to release liner  239  discussed above with reference to ECG device  110  and  FIGS. 2F-2G ). 
     The distance D 2  and the distance D 1  can be the same or different. For example, D 2  can be less than D 1 . In another example, D 2  can be greater than D 2 . 
       FIG. 2R  illustrates a block diagram representing a method  370  of determining patient physiological parameters using the ECG device  310 . At step  371 , the reusable device  305  establishes connection with the disposable device  303 . This can occur when the reusable device is mechanically mated with the disposable device  303 . The connection between the reusable device  305  and the disposable device  303  can be established via contact between the conductive pins  353 ,  354  and the conductive strips  344 ,  345  supported by pin supports  319 ,  320  as discussed above. The contact between the conductive pins  353 ,  354  and the conductive strips  344 ,  345  can occur when the hub  306  of the reusable device  305  is mounted on the dock  304  of the disposable device  303 . At step  372 , the reusable device  305  can provide power to the disposable device  303 . The power provided by the reusable device  305  can power the external and internal electrodes  312 ,  311  to collect electrocardiogram data. In some variants, the disposable portion  303  does not comprise a power source and relies entirely on the reusable device  305  to collect electrocardiogram data. 
     At step  373 , the disposable device  303  receives power from the reusable device  305 . At step  374 , the disposable device  303  uses the one or more external electrodes  312  and/or the one or more internal electrodes  311  to collect raw ECG data from the patient. At step  375 , the raw ECG data collected by the external electrodes  312  and/or the internal electrodes  311  can be transmitted to the reusable device  305 . The raw ECG data can be transmitted via the flexible circuit  325  as discussed above. The raw ECG data can be transmitted from the disposable device  303  to the reusable device  305  automatically or manually upon user input. The raw ECG data can be transmitted continuously or with a predetermined delay. 
     At step  376 , the reusable device  305  can collect raw temperature data. The raw temperature data can be collected by the temperature sensor  309 . The raw temperature data can be collected simultaneously or non-simultaneously from the raw ECG data. For example, the reusable device  305  can collect the raw temperature data regardless of whether the disposable device is collecting and/or transmitting the raw ECG data. 
     Care providers may be able to configure the ECG device  310  to determine which physiological data to be collected in different circumstances. The ECG device  310  can be configured to collect and process temperature-related physiological data in certain, predetermined situations. For example, the ECG device  310  can be configured to measure temperature of a patient when it detects ECG signals associated with irregular heart activities and/or bodily conditions. For example, the ECG device  310  can be configured to measure temperature of a patient when a variation in ECG signals over a predetermined time period exceeds a threshold value. In another example, the ECG device  310  can be configured to collect ECG data from a patient when a temperature measurement exceeds or falls below a threshold value, which can be indicative of an abnormal condition. Other types information related to different patient parameters and/or conditions can be used to trigger the ECG device  310  to collect ECG and/or temperature data. 
     At step  377 , the reusable device  305  (for example, the processor  307 ) can perform signal processing on the raw ECG and temperature data to determine physiological parameters related to a patient&#39;s heart activity and temperature. At step  378 , the reusable device  305  of the ECG device  310  can transmit the physiological parameters to other patient monitoring systems and/or devices via wires or various wireless communication protocols. 
     In some variants, the ECG device  310  is waterproof or water-resistant. For example, the reusable device  305  and/or the disposable device  303  can be configured such that, when secured to one another, they prevent water from entering into an interior thereof. This can minimize or prevent damage to the reusable device  305  and/or the disposable device  303  and/or components thereof (such as the temperature sensor  309 , the internal electrodes  311 , and/or the circuit board  359 ). 
     In some variants, other portions of the ECG device  310  comprise a material that provides thermal conductivity but minimize or prevent electrical conductivity, such as boron nitride. For example, portions of the dock  304  and/or the hub  306  can be made with plastic coated with boron nitride. In some variants, portions of the ECG device  310  (for example, the dock  304  and/or the hub  306 ) comprise materials that provide temperature isolation. For example, the dock  304  and the hub  306  can be manufactured using coated fiberglass. 
     ECG Packaging 
       FIGS. 4A-4C  illustrate views of a packaging device  400  (also referred to herein as an “ECG packaging device”) that can be used to secure and/or package portions of the ECG device  110 . For example, the packaging device  400  can be used to secure and/or package the disposable portion  203  of the ECG device  110 . While  FIGS. 4A-4C  illustrate the ECG device  110  or portions thereof, it is to be understood that the ECG device  310  or portions thereof (for example, the disposable portion  303 ) can be secured and/or can interact with the packaging device  400  in a similar or identical manner. Accordingly, the discussion that follows below with reference to disposable device  203  of ECG device  110  is equally applicable to the disposable device  303  of ECG device  310 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 4A , the packaging device  400  can include a body placement indicator portion  410  and one or more disposable device securement portions, for example, a dock securement portion  420  and/or an electrode securement portion  440 . The packaging device  400  can include an opening  450  extending along an interior of a portion of the packaging device  400  that can allow flexing and/or bending of the device  400 , for example, as shown in  FIG. 4C . The opening  450  can extend along a centerline axis  470  of the device  400  as shown. In such configuration, when the device  400  is bent as shown in  FIG. 4C , the device  400  can be split in half and can stand upright and/or partially upright. As shown, one half can include the body placement indicator portion  410  and/or the dock securement portion  420 , and the other half can include the electrode securement portion  440 . 
     The dock securement portion  420  can be configured to secure (for example, removably secure) the dock  204  of the disposable device  203 . The dock securement portion  420  can include a placement indicator  422  and one or more prongs  424 , for example, one, two, three, four, five, or six or more prongs  424 . As an example, the dock securement portion  420  can include two prongs  424  positioned opposite one another about the placement indicator  422  ( FIG. 4A ). The one or more prongs  424  can be formed from and/or integral with other portions of the device  400 . The one or more prongs  424  can be bendable and/or resilient. The one or more prongs  424  can be configured to bend away from a surface  401  of the device  400  such that portions of the dock  204  can be secured between the prongs  424  and the surface  401  of the device  400 . For example, with reference to  FIG. 4B , the one or more prongs  424  can be configured to bend a distance away from the surface  401  an amount that is equal to or greater than a thickness of the laminate structure  211  of the dock  204  which can include one or more substrates as discussed above. 
     The electrode securement portion  440  can be configured to secure (for example, removably secure) the one or more electrodes  112  of the disposable portion  203  of the ECG device  110 . The electrode securement portion  440  can include one or more placement indicators  442  configured to indicate a placement of the one or more electrodes  112 . Each of the one or more placement indicators  442  can include a unique graphic and/or label that indicates placement of a particular one of the one or more electrodes  112  ( FIG. 4A ). For example, each of the one or more placement indicators  442  can include a graphic and/or label that corresponds to a graphic and/or label on each of the electrodes  112  as illustrated in  FIG. 4D  and as discussed above. 
     The electrode securement portion  440  can include one or more prongs  444 , for example, one, two, three, four, five, or six, seven, or eight or more prongs  444 . The electrode securement portion  440  can include one or more pairs of prongs  444 , for example, one, two, three, four, five, or six or more pairs of prongs  444 . The one or more prongs  444  can be formed from and/or integral with other portions of the device  400 . The one or more prongs  444  can be bendable and/or resilient. The one or more prongs  444  can be configured to bend away from the surface  401  of the device  400  such that portions of the electrodes  112  can be secured between the prongs  444  and the surface  401  of the device  400 . For example, with reference to  FIG. 4B , the one or more prongs  444  can be configured to bend a distance away from the surface  401  that is dimensioned to fit thicknesses of the electrodes  112  (for example a thickness of the laminate structure  221  of the electrodes  112 ). The number of prongs  444  can correspond with the number of electrodes  112  of the disposable portion  203  of the ECG device  110 . For example, the electrode securement portion  440  can include a pair of prongs  44  for each electrode  112  of the disposable device  203  so that each electrode  112  is secured by two prongs  444 . Each prong  44  in a pair can be positioned opposite one another about the placement indicator  422  ( FIG. 4A ). 
     The packaging device  400  can include one or more features that can retain and/or secure portions of the cables  114  of the disposable portion  203  of the ECG device  110 . For example, the device  400  can include one or more cable securement prongs  446  that can be configured to bend away from the surface  401  of the device  400  such that portions of the cables  114  can be received and/or secured at least partially between the prongs  446  and the surface  401  of the device  400 . For example, with reference to  FIG. 4B , the one or more prongs  446  can be configured to bend a distance away from the surface  401  an amount that is equal to or greater than a dimension (for example, diameters) of the cables  114 . The one or more prongs  446  can be formed from and/or integral with other portions of the device  400 . The one or more prongs  446  can be bendable and/or resilient. The one or more prongs  446  can be positioned in the electrode securement portion  440 . For example, the one or more prongs  446  can be positioned proximate and/or between the one or more prongs  444 . Such configuration can advantageously allow portions of the cable  114  to secure within the one or more prongs  446  when the one or more electrodes  112  are secured by the one or more prongs  444  (see  FIG. 4A-4C ). The device  400  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, or twelve or more cable securement prongs  446  or groups of cable securement prongs  446 . For example, the device  400  can include a group of prongs  446  for each number of electrodes  112 . For example, the device  400  can include two, three, or four prongs  446  per each number of electrodes  112 . In some variants, one or more of the prongs  446  within each group are oriented opposite a nearby prong  446  in order to reduce or prevent portions of the cables  114  from being inadvertently removed (see  FIG. 4A-4C ). 
     In addition or as an alternative to the one or more cable securement prongs  446 , the device  400  can include one or more notches  452  that are sized and/or shaped to receive and/or secure portions of the cables  114 . For example, the device  400  can include one, two, three, or four or more notches  452 . The number of notches  452  can correspond with the number of cables  114  and/or electrodes  112 . The notches  452  can be positioned adjacent to the opening  450 , as shown in  FIGS. 4A-4B . The notches  452  can include a channel and an aperture positioned at an end of the channel. The channel can have a sized and/or shape that is smaller than a cross-section of the cables  114  and the aperture can have a cross-section that is sized and/or shaped to match the cross-section of the cables  114 . Such configuration can allow portions of the cables  114  to be held at least partially within the apertures without moving out of the notches  452  via the channels. Portions of the device  400  adjacent the channels of the notches  452  can be bent or flexed to allow portions of the cables  114  to be positioned within and/or through the apertures of the notches  452 . 
     The device  400  can include a body placement indicator portion  410  that can include a visual representation of a body and one or more body placement indicators that can indicate an a suggested placement of each of the one or more electrodes  112  and/or the dock  204  on the body. For example, with reference to  FIG. 4A , the body placement indicator portion  410  can include one or more electrode body placement indicators  474  that can correspond with a different and unique one of the electrodes  112  and the placement indicators  442 . Additionally or alternatively, the body placement indicator portion  410  can include a dock body placement indicator  472  that can correspond with the placement indicator  422 . The one or more electrode body placement indicators  474  and dock body placement indicator  472  can advantageously help to quickly instruct a caregiver on an appropriate placement of the dock  204  and the electrodes  112  on a patient&#39;s body. Additionally, the device  400  can include placement order indicators  460 ,  462 ,  464 ,  466 ,  468  which can indicate an order in which each of the components of the disposable portion  203  should be placed and/or secured to a patient. 
     While  FIGS. 4A-4D  illustrate packaging device  400  being configured to secure a disposable portion  203  including four electrodes  112  and four cables  114 , the packaging device  400  can be configured differently in order to secure an alternative number of electrodes  112  and cables  114 . For example, as shown by  FIG. 4E , packaging device  400  can be configured to secure a disposable portion  203  having two electrodes  112  and two cables  114 . For example, the device  400  can include two placement indicators  442 , two pairs of prongs  444 , one or more prongs  446  or groups of prongs  446  for each cable  114 , two notches  452 , two electrode body placement indicators  474 , a dock body placement indicator  472 , and one or more of the placement order indicators  460 ,  462 ,  464 . 
     Blood Pressure Monitor 
       FIGS. 5A-5AA  illustrate various views and aspects of the blood pressure monitor  120  (also referred to herein as “blood pressure device” and “blood pressure monitoring device”). While the device  120  is referred to as a “blood pressure monitor” or “blood pressure device” herein, device  120  can measure and/or monitor other parameters in addition or as an alternative to blood pressure. For example, blood pressure device  120  can measure and/or monitor the concentration or partial pressure of carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) in exhaled air of the patient. As another example, as mentioned above the blood pressure monitor  120  can include an accelerometer and/or gyroscope to measure motion data. Blood pressure device  120  can be, for example, a noninvasive blood pressure device and can have the characteristics and/or functionality as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety 
       FIGS. 5A-5H  illustrate various views of the blood pressure monitor  120 . Blood pressure monitor  120  can include a housing  502 . As shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B, 5C-5D , and  5 F, and as further discussed below, blood pressure monitor  120  can be configured to secure to an arm of patient  111 , for example, by securing to a blood pressure cuff  121 . Blood pressure cuff  121  can wrap around and/or otherwise secure to an arm of patient  111 , and blood pressure monitor  120  can secure to the blood pressure cuff  121 , for example, via securement between one or more ports of the blood pressure monitor  120  and one or more prongs of the blood pressure cuff  121  as discussed further below. As also discussed further below, blood pressure monitor  120  can be configured to connect to cuff  121  and inflate and/or deflate the cuff  121 . As also discussed further below, blood pressure monitor  120  can provide air to the cuff  121  to inflate the cuff  121  to a pressure level high enough to occlude a major artery. When air is slowly released from the cuff  121 , blood pressure can be estimated by blood pressure monitor  120  as described in more detail below in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 1A-1B and 5A , blood pressure monitor  120  can connect to one or more physiological sensors and/or monitors, such as ECG device  110  and/or patient monitor  130 , each of which are discussed in more detail elsewhere herein. For example, a cable  105  and connector  105   a  can connect to a connector port  516  (see  FIGS. 1A-1B and 5A ) of the blood pressure monitor  120  and also connect to ECG device  110  (see  FIGS. 1A-1B and 2A ). Additionally or alternatively, cable  107  can connect to a connector port  514  (see  FIGS. 1A-1B and 5A ) of the blood pressure monitor  120  and can also connect to patient monitor  130  (see  FIGS. 1A-1B  and  FIG. 8A ). For example, cable  107  and connector  107   a  can connect to a female connector port  832  of patient monitor  130  (see  FIGS. 8A and 8I ). In some variants, cable  107  is permanently secured to the blood pressure monitor  120  at the connector port  514 . For example, an end of cable  107  can be permanently hard-wired to a circuit board of blood pressure monitor  120  and thus can be not removably securable like connector  105   a  and/or  107   a . As discussed previously, blood pressure monitor  120  can include a bypass bus that can pass physiological data received from the ECG device  110  to the patient monitor  130  without processing such data. For example, the bypass bus of blood pressure monitor  120  can pass physiological data received via cable  105  and connector  105   a  by connector port  516  to connector port  514 , through cable  107  and connector  107   a , and to patient monitor  130  via connector port  433  without processing such data. 
     Blood pressure monitor  120  can include various electronic components to allow the blood pressure monitor  120  to carry out its physiological measurement and/or monitoring functionality, while the cuff  121  ( FIG. 5I ) can include little or no electronic components and/or functionality. For example, in some cases, the only electronic components in the cuff  121  are those that relate to and/or provide near field communication (NFC) with the blood pressure monitor  120 , which is described further below. In some cases, the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or the cuff  121  can be configured such that the blood pressure monitor  120  does not contact the patient when the cuff  121  and the blood pressure monitor  120  are secured to the patient. Such configuration can allow the blood pressure monitor  120  to be “reusable” and the cuff  121  to be “disposable.” In some variants, the blood pressure monitor  120  includes a label portion  521 , for example, on a top surface of the blood pressure monitor  120  ( FIGS. 5A-5B ). 
     As discussed in more detail below, the blood pressure monitor  120  and the cuff  121  can include various features which allow for removable securement. Such removable securement can advantageously allow the cuff  121  to remain attached to the patient  111  while the blood pressure monitor  120  is removed from the patient  111  and/or cuff  121 . This can be especially helpful where it is desirable to temporarily remove the housing  502  for inspection or repair. This can also allow a caregiver to clean the cuff  121  and/or regions of the patient  111  proximate the cuff  121  without risking damage to the blood pressure monitor  120  (or various components thereof). 
       FIGS. 5B-5H  illustrate various views of the blood pressure monitor  120 . As shown, the blood pressure monitor  120  (and/or the housing  502 ) can include a first end  510 , a second end  512  opposite the first end  510 , a first side  513 , and a second side  515  opposite the first side  513 . While the present disclosure refers to “end” or “side”, such terminology is not intended to be limiting, but rather, is employed for mere convenience in differentiating certain features of the blood pressure monitor  120 . Accordingly, while the term “end” is used for the first and second ends  510 ,  512 , it is to be understood that such ends  510 ,  512  can also represent “sides” of the blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     The connector port  516  can extend from the first end  510 , and as discussed above, can connect to a connector and/or cable such as connector  105   a  and cable  105 . Connector port  516  can protrude outward from a portion of the first end  510 . The connector port  516  can be have a width and/or height that is less than a width and/or height of the first end  510 . The first end  510  can additionally or alternatively include a connector port  514  which can be spaced from the connector port  516  along the first end  510 . As also discussed above, connector port  514  can connect to a cable  107 . As also discussed above, an end of cable  107  can be irremovably secured to blood pressure monitor  120  via connector port  514 . For example, an end of the cable  107  can be hard-wired to a circuit board of blood pressure monitor  120 . Connector port  514  can protrude outward from the first end  510 . Connector port  514  can protrude outward from the first end  510  a distance greater than the connector port  516  (see  FIGS. 5C-5D ). Connector port  514  can have a circular cross-section, a conical cross-section, and/or a combination of the same or different shaped cross-sections or shapes. Connector port  514  can have a cross-section that tapers (or decreases) from a first end of the connector port  514  that connects to the first end  510  to a second end of the connector port  514  that is opposite from the first end of the connector port  514 . Connector port  514  can have an increased cross-section at the second end of the connector port  514  (see  FIGS. 5C-5D ). Connector port  516  can be positioned in a middle of the first end  510 . Connector port  514  can be positioned on either side of connector port  516  along the first end  510 . As discussed further below, the blood pressure monitor  120  can include one or more ports that can provide fluid communication between an interior of the housing  502  and a bladder of the cuff  121 . For example, the blood pressure monitor  120  can include one or both of ports  570 ,  572  ( FIG. 5D ), each of which are described in more detail below. 
       FIGS. 5I-5M  illustrate various views of the cuff  121 , with and without the blood pressure monitor  120  attached. As shown, the cuff  121  can include a first portion  540  and a second portion  542 . The second portion  542  can have tapered or partially tapered edges, as shown. The cuff  121  can have a width W 1  and a length L 1  (see  FIG. 5L ). The width Wi can extend between sides  545  and  547 . The length L 1  can extend between ends  541  and  543 . The width W 1  can be less than length L 1 . The first portion  540  can include an attachment portion  544  configured to secure to an attachment portion of the second portion  542 , which can be on an opposite surface of the cuff  121  as the attachment portion  544 . For example, the attachment portion  544  can comprise a hook-and-loop fastener that can removably secure to a hook-and loop-fastener of an attachment portion of the second portion  542 . The first portion  540  of the cuff  121  can include a bladder layer (also referred to herein as “bladder”), such as bladder layer  543  (see  FIG. 5X ) that can be configured to contact the patient when the cuff  121  is secured to the patient. The bladder  543  can be configured to inflate and deflate, as further discussed elsewhere herein. The cuff  121  can include, for example, in the first portion  540 , a securement portion which can facilitate removable securement of the blood pressure monitor  120 . For example, the cuff  121  can include one or more prongs that can secure to portions of the blood pressure monitor  120 . For example, the cuff  121  can include one or both of prongs  550 ,  552  that can be configured to be received and/or secure within one or more ports of the blood pressure monitor  120  (such as ports  570 ,  572 ). The prongs  550 ,  552  can be spaced apart from one another. The prongs  550 ,  552  can be spaced equally from an end  541  and/or end  543  of the cuff  121 . The prong  550  can be spaced a first distance from a first side  545  of the cuff  121  and the prong  552  can be spaced a second distance from a second side  547  of the cuff  121 , and such described first and second distances can be equal. The prong  550  can be spaced a first distance from a first side  545  of the cuff  121  and the prong  552  can be spaced a second distance from the first side  545  of the cuff  121 , and such described first and second distances can be not equal. The prong  550  can be spaced a first distance from a second side  547  of the cuff  121  and the prong  552  can be spaced a second distance from the second side  547  of the cuff  121 , and such described first and second distances can be equal. The width W 1  of the cuff  121 , spacing and/or positioning of the prongs  550 ,  552 , and/or a width and/or length of the blood pressure monitor  120  can be configured such that, when the blood pressure monitor  120  is secured to the cuff  121  (for example, via securement of the prongs  550 ,  552  within ports  570 ,  572  of the blood pressure monitor  120 ), the blood pressure monitor  120  is positioned within the width W 1  of the cuff  121  (for example, ends of the blood pressure monitor  120  at or spaced inwards from sides  545 ,  547 ) (see  FIGS. 5L-5M ). 
     Advantageously, the spacing and/or positioning of the prongs  550 ,  552  with respect to each other and/or ends  541 ,  543 , and/or sides  545 ,  547  can be configured so that the device  120  is symmetrically positioned with respect to the width W 1  of the cuff  121  regardless of whether the device  120  and/or the cuff  121  is secured in an first orientation (for example,  FIG. 5L ) or a second orientation (for example,  FIG. 5M ), for example, on an arm of patient  111 . Such first and second orientations can be the reverse or opposite of each other (see  FIGS. 5L-5M ). The spacing and/or positioning of the prongs  550 ,  552  with respect to each other and/or ends  541 ,  543 , and/or sides  545 ,  547  can be configured so that the device  120  is symmetrically positioned with respect to the width W 1  of the cuff  121  regardless of whether the prong  550  is secured to the port  570  or the port  572  and/or regardless of whether the prong  552  is secured to the port  570  or the port  572 . This can advantageously allow the cuff  121  and the device  120  be symmetrically positioned when secured to either a right arm or a left arm of a patient  111  as illustrated in  FIGS. 1A-1B . Additionally, the incorporation of both of prongs  550 ,  552  can provide increased stability when secured to the ports  570 ,  572  of the device  120 . As described further below, the prongs  550 ,  552  can include fluid passages that are in fluid communication with the bladder  543  of the cuff  121 . 
       FIGS. 5N-5O  illustrate an optional support body  560  that can be secured to other portions of the cuff  121  during assembly. Where the cuff  121  includes such support body  560 , the support body  560  can include the prongs  550 ,  552 . The prongs  550 ,  552  can include fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  which can extend through a length of the prongs  550 ,  552  and a base  554  of the support body  560  (see  FIG. 5O ). The support body  560  can include one or more bumps  553  extending from a bottom surface of the base  554  of the support body  560 . The one or more bumps  553  can be positioned around the fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  as shown in  FIG. 5O . For example, the support body  560  can include one, two, three, or four or more bumps  553  extending from a bottom surface of the base  554  of the support body  560 . The one or more bumps  553  can be spaced apart from one another relative to the fluid passages  550   a ,  552 . Such bumps  553  can advantageously help ensure that bladder  543  does not cover the fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  (see  FIG. 5X ) when the blood pressure monitor  120  is in use with the cuff  121 . For example, the one or more bumps  553  can space a surface of the bladder  543  from the fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  and provide a gap between ends of the fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  at a surface of body  554 . The support body  560  can be welded to portions of the cuff  121  such that only the prongs  550 ,  552  are visible, as shown in  FIG. 5I-5J . 
     The blood pressure monitor  120  and cuff  121  can include near field communication (NFC) structure and/or functionality that can enable the blood pressure monitor  120  to, among other things: confirm that the cuff  121  is an authorized product; transfer information and/or data to the cuff  121  for storage; determine the size of a particular cuff  121  to which the blood pressure monitor  120  is attached; and/or determine a lifespan of the cuff  121 . For example, in some cases, after the blood pressure monitor  120  detects a size of the cuff  121  to which it is attached via the NFC (such as that described below), the blood pressure monitor  120  determines a particular inflation rate and/or profile that is unique to that particular cuff  121 . For example, such particular inflation rate and/or profile can be different for smaller cuffs  121  (for example, for young children or neonatal patients) than for larger cuffs  121  (for example, for adults). The blood pressure monitor  120  can include an NFC reader that transmits a radio frequency and the cuff  121  can include an NFC tag (for example, in the form of a sticker or label) which can be attached to a portion of the cuff  121  or within an interior portion of the cuff  121 . For example, the blood pressure monitor  120  can include an RFID reader that transmits a radio frequency and the cuff  121  can include an RFID tag (for example, in the form of a sticker or label) which can be attached to a portion of the cuff  121  or within an interior portion of the cuff  121 . The RFID tag can be placed on an outer surface of the cuff  121 , for example, proximate to the prongs  550 ,  552 . Alternatively, the RFID tag can be positioned within an interior portion of the cuff  121 . For example, where the cuff  121  includes the support body  560 , an RFID tag can be positioned within a recessed portion  548  of the support body  560  (see  FIGS. 5J and 5N ). The recessed portion  548  can be positioned proximate the prongs  550 ,  552 , for example, between the prongs  550 ,  552 . With reference to  FIG. 5J , the cuff  121  can include a placement indicator  546  that can be configured to indicate a proper placement of the blood pressure monitor  120  on the cuff  121 . The placement indicator  546  can have a sized and/or shaped that matches a size and/or shape of the blood pressure monitor  120  (such as a perimeter of the blood pressure monitor  120 ). 
     The blood pressure monitor  120  (for example, the housing  502 ) can include one or more air intakes which can enable fluid communication with ambient air outside the housing  502 . As discussed elsewhere herein, the blood pressure monitor  120  can also include one or more air pumps  522  which can create suction to draw ambient air into and/or through such air intake(s) of housing  502 . Such air intake(s) can be located and/or positioned in a variety of locations on the housing  502 , for example, sides, ends, and/or top or bottom surfaces of housing  502 . Housing  502  can include one, two, three, four, five, or six or more air intakes. For example, housing  502  can include an air intake located along one of sides  513 ,  515  and/or ends  510 ,  512 . 
       FIGS. 5P-5Q  illustrate cross-sections through the blood pressure monitor  120 .  FIGS. 5P-5R  further illustrate an air intake  580  of the blood pressure monitor  120 . The air intake  580  can be configured such that air flowing into and/or out of an interior  588  of the blood pressure monitor  120  travels in a non-straight path. As discussed below, this can advantageously inhibit liquids from entering into the interior  588 , which could cause damage to internal components of the blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     The housing  502  can include an opening  581  in a portion of the first end  512  of the housing  502 . With reference to  FIG. 5H , the opening  581  can comprise a slit having a width that is greater than a height. The opening  581  can extend along a portion of the first end  512  of the housing  502 . The housing  502  can include an inner wall  582  spaced away from the first end  512  (or the exterior wall defined by the first end  512 ). With reference to  FIGS. 5Q-5R , the inner wall  582  can partition (for example, “divide”) the interior  588  of the housing  502  into a first portion  588   a  and a second portion  588   b . As shown, the first portion  588   a  can be closer to the wall defined by the first end  512  and/or the opening  581 . The first portion  588   a  can be in fluid communication with ambient outside the housing  502  via opening  581 . The inner wall  582  can include an opening  583 . The opening  583  can provide fluid communication between the first and second portions  588   a ,  588   b . The opening  583  can comprise a square, rectangular, or circular shape, among others. The opening  583  can comprise a square or rectangular shape with rounded corners (see  FIG. 5P ). 
     As shown in  FIG. 5R , the opening  581  can be positioned a distance D 1  from a bottom of the housing  502 . A top portion  583   a  of the opening  583  can be positioned a distance D 3  away from the bottom of the housing  502  and a bottom portion  583   b  of the opening  583  can be positioned a distance D 2  from the bottom of the housing  502 . As also shown, the housing  502  can have a height H 1 . 
     The air intake  580  can be defined (or “formed”) by the opening  581 . Where the housing  502  includes the inner wall  582 , the air intake  580  can be defined (or “formed”) by the opening  581  and the opening  583 . Further, the positioning of the openings  581 ,  583  relative to the bottom of the housing  502  can be selected such that a flow path for air entering or exiting the interior  588  (for example, second portion  588   b ) is not-straight. For example, the opening  581  and opening  583  can be not aligned with each other. As another example, the distance D 1  can be different from (for example, less than) one or both of distances D 2 , D 3  and/or different from (for example, less than) a distance from an axis extending through a center of opening  583  and the bottom of the housing  502 . Such configuration can advantageously inhibit (for example, prevent) liquids from entering into the interior  588 , which could cause damage to internal components of the blood pressure monitor  120 . At the same time, such configuration can still allow air to flow into and out of the interior  588  (for example, second portion  588   b ). 
     With continued reference to  FIGS. 5P-5R , the housing  502  can include an inner wall  586 . The inner wall  586  can extend from a bottom interior surface of the housing  502 . The inner wall  586  can extend upward from the bottom interior surface (for example, towards a top interior surface of the housing  502 ) and partially partition the first portion  588   a  of the interior  588 . The inner wall  586  can have a tip or end that is positioned a distance D 4  from the bottom of the housing  502  (see  FIG. 5R ). The distance D 4  can be different from the distance D 1 , distance D 2 , and/or distance D 3  For example, the distance D 4  can be greater than the distance D 1 , distance D 2 , and/or distance D 3 . The inner wall  586  can extend such that a tip or end of the inner wall  586  is positioned (vertically) between the top and bottom portions  583   a ,  583   b  of the opening  583 . For example, the distance D 4  can be greater than the distance D 2  but less than the distance D 3 . 
     In some variants, the housing  502  includes a wall  587  proximate the opening  581 , which can extend from a bottom surface or portion of the housing  502  towards a top surface or portion of the housing  502 . A tip or end of the wall  587  can be higher (for example, vertically) than the height of the opening  581  with reference to the view illustrated in  FIG. 5R . The housing  502  can include a notched portion  589  extending along a portion of the width of the opening  581  (for example, along the first end  512 ) that can accommodate the wall  587  such that air can flow through opening  581 , over and/or around the wall  587 , and into the first portion  588   a  of the interior  588 . 
     The air intake  580  can be defined (or “formed”) by the opening  581  in the first end  512  and the opening  583  in the inner wall  582 . The air intake  580  can additionally be defined by one or both of the inner walls  582 ,  586 , wall  587 , and/or the notched portion  589 . Such configurations can create an air flow path into the interior  588  that is non-linear. For example, such configurations can create an air flow path into the interior  588  that is tortuous, meandering, and/or serpentine. As discussed below, this can advantageously allow air to flow into and out of the interior  588  but inhibit or prevent liquids from entering into the interior  588  of the blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     The housing  502  can be formed from more than one component. For example, with reference to  FIGS. 5S-5T , the housing  502  can be formed from a top portion  502   a  and a bottom portion  502   b . During assembly, a membrane or gasket  502   c  can be positioned between portions of the top and bottom portions  502   a ,  502   b , for example to provide a seal which prevents liquid from entering an interior  588  of the housing  502 . As shown, the inner wall  582  and/or the opening  583  can be formed from the top portion  502   a . As also shown, the inner wall  586  and/or  587  can be formed from the bottom portion  502   b . With reference to  FIGS. 5R-5S , the inner wall  582  can be formed from a portion of the top portion  502   a , the gasket  502   c , and a portion of the bottom portion  502   b  so that the first interior portion  588   a  is sealed from the second interior portion  588   b  other than the opening  583  (for example, air and/or liquid cannot pass around the gasket  502   c ). The opening  581  can be formed by a gap between a portion of the top portion  502   a  and a portion of the bottom portion  502   b  (see  FIGS. 5H and 5R ). The ports  570 ,  572  can be formed from the bottom portion  502   b  ( FIG. 5S-5T ). For example, the ports  570 ,  572  can extend from a bottom interior surface of the housing  502  (for example, the bottom portion  502   b ) upwards toward a top interior surface of the housing  502  (for example, the top portion  502   a ). 
       FIGS. 5U-5V  illustrate the blood pressure monitor  120  with a top portion removed (for example, with the top portion  502   a  removed) to better illustrate internal components of the blood pressure monitor  120 .  FIGS. 5W-5X  illustrate cross-sectional views of the blood pressure monitor  120  taken along a line through the ports  570 ,  572 .  FIG. 5V  is the same as  FIG. 5U  except that a top portion  520   c  of the manifold  520  (discussed below), the pumps  522 , and a flexible circuit  524  of the blood pressure monitor  120  are removed. The blood pressure monitor  120  can include one or more pumps  522 , a manifold  520 , one or more release valves  526 , and ports  570 ,  572 . As described further below, one or more of ports  572  can enable fluid communication between the interior  588  of the housing (for example, the manifold  520 ) and an interior  549  of a bladder  543  of cuff  121  when the prongs  550 ,  552  are receive and secured therein. As also described elsewhere herein, the prongs  550 ,  552  can include fluid passageways  550   a ,  552   a  that can be in fluid communication with the interior  549  of the bladder  543  of the cuff  121 . 
     The one or more pumps  522  can create suction to draw ambient air into and/or through air intake(s) of housing  502 , such as air intake  580  described above. The one or more pumps  522  can pump air into the manifold  520  (for example, via inlets  520   a ). Advantageously, including more than one pump into blood pressure monitor  120  can allow the device  120  (for example, the housing  502 ) to have a smaller height while still providing the same pumping capacity. The one or more release valves  526  can allow air to flow out of the manifold  520 , for example, into an interior  588  of the housing  502 . 
     The manifold  520  can include an opening  520   d  that can enable fluid communication between one of the fluid passageways  550   a ,  552   a  of one of the prongs  550 ,  552  and an interior of the manifold  520  when one of the prongs  550 ,  552  is secured within the port  572 . The blood pressure monitor  120  can include a valve configured to open and/or close the opening  520   d  to enable or prevent such fluid communication. For example, the blood pressure monitor  120  can include a valve  530  which is positioned within the manifold  520  proximate the opening  520   d . With reference to  FIGS. 5Z and 5AA , the valve  530  can include a body  531 , a sealing ring  532 , and a biasing member  533 . The body  531  can include a stem  531   a , a base  531   b , and a head  531   c . The stem  531  can be sized and/or shaped to fit within and/or through the biasing member  533 . The stem  531  can comprise a cross-patterned shape or another shape. The base  531   b  can have a circular shape. The head  531   c  can have a cylindrical shape and can have one or more openings  531   e  and an opening  531   f . For example, the head  531   c  can have one, two, three, or four or more openings  531   e . The one or more openings  531   e  can be positioned around an axis extending along a length of height of the valve  530  (for example, around an axis extending along a length of the stem  531   a ). The opening  531   f  can be aligned with an axis extending along a length of the valve  531 . For example, an axis extending through a center of the opening  531   f  can be parallel with an axis extending through the stem  531   a  and/or a height of the valve  530  or body  531 . The opening  531   f  can be oriented perpendicular with respect to the openings  531   e . For example, axes extending through a center of the openings  531   e  can be perpendicular with respect to an axis extending through a center of the opening  531   f . The body  531  can include a recessed portion  531   d  that is sized and/or shaped to receive the sealing ring  532 . As discussed further below, the valve  530  can allow air to flow through openings  531   e ,  531   f  so as to provide fluid communication between the interior of the manifold  520 , the fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  of the prongs  550 ,  552 , and/or the interior  549  of the bladder  543  of the cuff  121 . 
     The valve  530  can be configured to move so as to open and/or close a flow path through the opening  520   a  of the manifold  520 .  FIG. 5W  illustrates a cross-section through the blood pressure monitor  120  when the valve  530  is in a first position where the valve  530  cover the opening  520   d .  FIG. 5X  illustrates the cross-section of  FIG. 5W  where the cuff  121  is secured to the blood pressure monitor  120  via securement of the prongs  550 ,  552  within the ports  572 ,  570 , respectively.  FIG. 5X  further illustrates the valve  530  in a second position where the valve  530  does not cover or block the opening  520   d . The blood pressure monitor  120  can be configured such that the valve  530  is in the second position unless and/or until one of the prongs  550 ,  552  is secured within the port  572 . With continued reference to  FIGS. 5W-5X , when one of the prongs  550 ,  552  are secured within the port  572 , the valve  530  can be moved (for example, “pushed”) from the first position ( FIG. 5W ) to the second position ( FIG. 5X ). As discussed above, the valve  530  can include one or more openings  531   e  and opening  531   f . When the valve  530  is in the first position ( FIG. 5W ), the openings  531   e  can obstructed. For example, when the valve  530  is in the first position ( FIG. 5W ), fluid communication between the openings  531   e  and the interior of the manifold  520  can be inhibited or prevented. When the valve  530  is in the second position ( FIG. 5X ) the openings  531   e  can be in fluid communication with the interior of the manifold  520 . In such second position, air can flow through the openings  531   e , opening  531   f , fluid passageway  550   a , and into an interior  549  of a bladder  543  of the cuff  121 . Further, in such second position, air can flow in an opposite direction, for example, from the interior  549  of the bladder  543  of the cuff  121 , through the fluid passageway  550   a , opening  531   f , openings  531   e , and into the interior of the manifold  520 . 
     As discussed above, the valve  530  can include a sealing ring  532 . When the valve  530  is in the first position ( FIG. 5W ), the sealing ring  532  can contact a surface of the manifold  520  around the opening  520   d . Additionally, when the valve  530  is in the second position ( FIG. 5X ), the sealing ring  532  can be spaced from the surface of the manifold  520  around the opening  520   a . Each of the ports  572 ,  570  can include a sealing ring  572   a ,  570   a  that can be received by recessed portions  550   b ,  552   b  of the prongs  550 ,  552  (see  FIGS. 5W-5X and 5N ). The recessed portions  550   b ,  552   b  of the prongs  550 ,  552  can comprise an annular recess around a perimeter of the prongs  550 ,  552 . 
     In some cases, only one of the ports  572 ,  570  of the blood pressure monitor  120  is configured to enable fluid communication between an interior of the housing  502  (for example, an interior of the manifold  520 ) and fluid passages  550   a ,  552   a  of the prongs  550 ,  552  when the prongs  550 ,  552  are received and/or secured in the ports  572 ,  570 . For example, with reference to  FIGS. 5V-5X , the blood pressure monitor  120  can include both of ports  570  and  572  but only port  572  is configured to enable such fluid communication. The blood pressure monitor  120  can include a cap  523  ( FIGS. 5V and 5Y ) that is secured to an end of the port  570 . In such cases, while port  570  does not enable such fluid communication, the port  570  can advantageously allow for more stability and/or more robust securement with the cuff  121 . For example, regardless of whether the blood pressure monitor  120  and cuff  121  are secured in either of the two orientations shown in  FIG. 5L or 5M , one of the prongs  550 ,  552  will be secured within port  572  to enable fluid communication between the interior  549  of the bladder  543  and the interior  588  of the housing  502 . Additionally, regardless of such described orientations, the other of the two prongs  550 ,  552  not secured within port  572  can secure within port  570  and provide stability to the blood pressure monitor  120  on the cuff  121 . 
     As discussed further in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, the blood pressure monitor  120  can include one or more pressure transducers that are configured to detect an air pressure in the cuff  121 . The blood pressure monitor  120  can include, for example, one or two pressure transducers. The pressure transducer(s) can be coupled to and/or positioned proximate the circuit board  521 . The pressure transducer(s) can be positioned adjacent and/or proximate to the manifold  520  of the blood pressure monitor  120 . For example, the manifold  520  can include one or more openings in a bottom portion  520   b  of the manifold  520  that are positioned proximate or adjacent the pressure transducer(s). In some cases, it can be beneficial to isolate or partially isolate such openings in the manifold  520  with other portions of the manifold  520  and/or other portions of blood pressure monitor  120 . For example, it can be beneficial to partially isolate such openings from inlets  520   a , which can be in fluid communication with the pumps  522 . The blood pressure monitor  120  can include one or more towers  527  extending around openings in the bottom portion  520   b  of the manifold  520  and/or extending upward from the bottom portion  520   b  of the manifold  520 . The towers  527  can be hollow. The towers  527  can be cylindrical, for example. The towers  527  can extend from the bottom portion  520   b  of the manifold  520  upwards to a top portion  520   c  of the manifold  520  (see  FIG. 5U ). The towers  527  can include a notch  527   a  which can provide fluid communication between an interior of the towers  527  and the manifold  520 . The notch  527   a  can be sized and/or shaped to provide an air flow path over a portion of an end of the towers  527  (for example, a top end of the towers  527 ) so that air can flow into the manifold  520  from the towers  527  and vice versa. Advantageously, the towers  527  can help isolate or partially isolate the openings in the bottom portion  520   b  and the flow path to pressure transducers from, for example, the inlets  520   a  of the pumps  520   a  which may see large fluctuations in air flow and/or pressure gradients that may interfere with the pressure transducers&#39; ability to function and/or operate properly or efficiently. 
     Blood pressure monitor  120  can include one or more light emitting diode (LED) indicators that can indicate a status of the blood pressure monitor  120 , for example, that the blood pressure monitor  120  is in an operational (“on”) mode. The LED indicator can be coupled to a side of the circuit board  521 , for example, a side that faces “up” in the orientation shown in  FIG. 5V  and/or faces toward a top portion  502   a  of the housing  502  of the monitor  120 . With reference to  FIG. 5V , the blood pressure monitor  120  can include a light pipe or tube  593  that surrounds and/or encircled the LED indicator. The light tube  593  can focus and/or direct light emitted from the LED indicator to a top portion of the blood pressure monitor  120 , such as a top portion  502   a  of the housing  502  of the monitor  120 . In some variants, a top portion of the blood pressure monitor  120  (for example, top portion  502   a ) is transparent, which can allow light from the LED indicator to be seen from outside the housing  502 . The light tube  593  can be non-transparent, for example, opaque. In some variants, the housing  502  comprises an opening on a top portion thereof (such as top portion  502   a ) that is aligned with the light tube  593  (such as an axis of the light tube  592 ) which allow light from the LED indicator to pass through the top portion to be seen. 
       FIGS. 5AB-5AJ  illustrate alternative designs for blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ which can be similar or identical to blood pressure cuff  121  described herein. Blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can be utilized with blood pressure monitor  120  in a similar or identical manner as described above with reference to blood pressure cuff  121  and therefore the discussion above with reference to blood pressure monitor  120  and blood pressure cuff  121  is equally applicable to blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″.  FIGS. 5AB, 5AE, and 5AH  illustrate top perspective views of the blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″, respectively. FIGS. SAC,  5 AF, and  5 AI illustrate top views of the blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″, respectively.  FIGS. 5AD, 5AG, and 5AJ  illustrate bottom views of the blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″, respectively. 
     Blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can include (respectively) first portions  540 ′,  540 ″,  540 ′″ and second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ′″ that can be similar or identical to first and second portions  540 ,  542  of cuff  121  in some or many ways, and therefore the discussion above with reference to first and second portions  540 ,  542  of cuff  121  is equally applicable to first portions  540 ′,  540 ″,  540 ′″ and second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ′ of blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″. By way of non-limiting example, second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ′ can be tapered in a similar or identical manner as that described above with respect to second portion  542 . As another example, first portions  540 ′,  540 ″,  540 ′ can include attachment portions  544 ′,  544 ″,  544 ′″ that can be similar or identical to attachment portion  544  of first portion  540 . Additionally, first portions  540 ′,  540 ″,  540 ′″ can include a bladder layer (which can also be referred to as a “bladder”) that can be similar or identical to bladder layer  543  and as described with reference to  FIG. 5X . Additionally, cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can include prongs similar or identical to prongs  550 ,  552  and/or can include a placement indicator  546 ′,  546 ″,  546 ′ that can be similar or identical to placement indicator  546 . Additionally, cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can include a support body similar or identical to support body  560  discussed above with reference to cuff  121 . 
     Blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′ can be substantially similar to one another in addition to being similar to cuff  121 . Blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can represent alternative sizes. For example, blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can represent “large”, “medium”, and “small” sizes. 
     In some implementations, one or more of the four sides of the cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ can be welded. For example, in some implementations, all four sides of cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ are welded. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 5AD, 5AG, and 5AJ , blood pressure cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′ can include an attachment portion  543 ′,  543 ″,  543 ′ (e.g., a hook and loop fastener) that can secure to the attachment portion  544 ′,  544 ″,  544 ′″ when the cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′ are secured to a subject (for example, wrapped around the subject&#39;s arm). As shown, such attachment portions  543 ′,  543 ″,  543 ′ can be located on the second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ′″ and not the first portions  540 ′,  540 ″,  540 ′″ which can include the inflatable bladder. Advantageously, such attachment portions  543 ′,  543 ″,  543 ′″ can be welded through the second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ′″, for example, entirely through one or more layers (e.g., top and bottom layers) of the second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ″. Such configuration advantageously can inhibit non-uniform movement of portions of the cuffs  121 ′,  121 ″,  121 ′″ during inflation of the bladder, for example, non-uniform movement of top and bottom internal layers and/or surfaces of the second portions  542 ′,  542 ″,  542 ′″ during inflation. This in turn reduces or prevents noise to pressure signal(s) that may otherwise be present, which is especially advantageous when determining blood pressure measurements based on the techniques discussed elsewhere herein. 
       FIGS. 6A-6Z  illustrate various views and aspects of a blood pressure monitor assembly  600  which includes an alternative design for a blood pressure monitor  602  and also includes a cradle  604 . While the device  602  is referred to herein as a “blood pressure monitor” or “blood pressure device” herein, device  602  can measure and/or monitor other parameters in addition or as an alternative to blood pressure. For example, device  602  can measure and/or monitor the concentration or partial pressure of carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) in exhaled air of the patient. Blood pressure monitor  602  can have the characteristics and/or functionality as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety 
     With reference to  FIGS. 6A-6E , blood pressure monitor assembly  600  can include a blood pressure monitor  602  and a cradle  604  configured to secure to the blood pressure monitor  602  (and vice versa). Blood pressure monitor assembly  600  can be configured to secure to an arm of patient  11 . For example, blood pressure monitor assembly  600  can secure to an a blood pressure cuff (such as cuff  737  shown in  FIG. 7V ) that is secured to a patient&#39;s arm. The blood pressure cuff can wrap around and/or otherwise secure to an arm of patient  11 , and blood pressure monitor assembly  600  can secure to the blood pressure cuff  737 , for example, via securement between cradle  604  and the blood pressure cuff. For example, cradle  604  can have an adhesive or a hook-and-look fastener (for example, Velcro®) on a bottom surface thereof, which can secure to a portion of the cuff  737 . 
     Blood pressure monitor assembly  600  can be configured to connect to a cuff  737  (see  FIG. 7V ) and provide air to the cuff to cause inflation and/or can allow the cuff  737  to deflate. For example, blood pressure monitor assembly  600  can include a pneumatic opening or connection point  670  (see  FIG. 6F ) in blood pressure device  602  (or a housing of blood pressure device  602 ) which can be in fluid communication with the cuff  737  via a pneumatic hose  637  (see  FIG. 6A ). As also discussed further below, cradle  604  can include one or more ports that can connect to and/or facilitate connection between the pneumatic hose  637  and the opening  670  in blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, as discussed in more detail below, cradle  604  can include an outward port  672   a  that can connect to pneumatic hose  637  and an inward port  672   b  which connects to opening  670  in blood pressure device  602  (see  FIGS. 6A and 6W-6X ). The securement between outward port  672   a  and pneumatic hose  637  can be a snap-fit, press-fit, friction-fit, or another type of securement. Further, while  FIG. 6A  illustrates an end of a pneumatic hose  637  connecting to port  672   a , the end of the pneumatic hose  637  can connect to port  672   a  via an adapter or other type of intermediary connector. Blood pressure device  602  can provide air to cuff  737  to inflate the cuff  737  to a pressure level high enough to occlude a major artery. When air is slowly released from the cuff  737 , blood pressure can be estimated by the blood pressure monitor  602  as described in more detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. 
     Blood pressure device  602  can include structure and/or functionality to cover and/or close opening  670  when the blood pressure device  602  is not in use so as to prevent debris and/or liquids from passing through opening  670  and passing into an interior of blood pressure device  602 . For example, with reference to  FIG. 6N , blood pressure device  602  can include a cover  679  that can cover and/or seal opening  670  when the blood pressure device  602  is not in use, and thus can prevent fluid communication between ambient air and the interior of the blood pressure device when not in use. For example, cover  679  can be a flap that can act to seal and/or close off opening  670  when the blood pressure device  602  is not connected to the cradle  604 . The flap can be movable, flexible, and/or resilient. The flap can cover opening  670  unless and/or until an object pushes the flap inward at least partially into an interior of the blood pressure device  602 . For example, when blood pressure device  602  is secured to cradle  604 , port  672   b  can push the flap at least partially inward into the interior of blood pressure device  602  so that port  672   b  can pass at least partially into the interior of blood pressure device  602  and be in fluid communication with a conduit, manifold, pump, and/or valve within the blood pressure device  602 . As another example, cover  679  can be rigid and can be electronically and/or mechanically controlled by a controller and/or processor of the blood pressure device  602 . For example, cover  679  can be a rigid plate that can be moved from a position where is it not covering, or only partially covering, opening  670 , to a position where it is covering and/or sealing opening  670 . Cover  679  can be sized and/or shaped to match the size and/or shape opening  670 . In some cases, the blood pressure device  602  can control operation (for example, movement) of the cover  679  based on interaction with cradle  604 . 
     As discussed elsewhere herein, the blood pressure device  602  and cradle  604  can include near field communication (NFC) functional capabilities (for example, RFID) that can enable the blood pressure device  602  and cradle  604  to, among other things: confirm that the blood pressure device  602  and/or cradle  604  are authentic components; transfer data (for example, data measured and/or gathered by the blood pressure device  602  can be transferred and/or stored on the cradle  604 ); determine the size of a cuff to which the cradle  604  is attached; and determine a lifespan of the blood pressure device  602  and/or cradle  604 . For example, as discussed below, the blood pressure device  602  can include an RFID reader that transmits a radio frequency and the cradle  604  can include an RFID tag (for example, in the form of a sticker or label) which can be attached to a portion of the cradle  604 . Such NFC structure and functionality can enable the blood pressure device  602  to control operation of the cover  679  based on proximity with cradle  604 . For example, when blood pressure device  602  is brought within sufficient proximity to the RFID tag of cradle  604  such that the RFID reader in the blood pressure device  602  receives a confirmatory signal from the RFID tag, blood pressure device  602  can automatically open cover  679  to reveal opening  670 . For example, the range of the RFID reader and tag can be selected so that bringing the blood pressure device  602  within a certain distance of cradle  604  causes such automatic opening of cover  679 . Such distance can be 1 inch, 2 inch, 3 inch, 4 inch, 5 inch, 6 inch, 7 inch, 8 inch, 9 inch, 10 inch, 111 inch, 12 inch, 1 ft, 1.5 ft, or 2 ft, or any value therebetween, or any range bounded by any combination of these values, although values outside these values or ranges can be used in some cases. 
     Blood pressure monitor  602  can connect to one or more physiological sensors and/or monitors, such as ECG device  110  and/or patient monitor  130 , each of which are discussed in more detail elsewhere herein. For example, a cable  105  and connector  105   a  can connect to a connector port  616  (see  FIG. 6B ) of blood pressure device  602  and also connect to ECG device  110  (see  FIG. 2A ). Additionally or alternatively, cable  107  can connect to and/or be coupled to (for example, fixed to) to a connector port  614  (see  FIG. 6A ) of blood pressure device  602  and can also connect to patient monitor  130  (see  FIG. 8A ). For example, cable  107  and connector  107   a  can connect to a female connector port  832  of patient monitor  130  (see  FIGS. 8A and 8I ). As discussed previously, blood pressure monitor  602  can include a bypass bus that can pass physiological data received from the ECG device  110  to the patient monitor  130  without processing. For example, the bypass bus of blood pressure monitor  602  can pass physiological data received via cable  105  and connector  105   a  by connector port  616  to connector port  614 , through cable  107  and connector  107   a , and to patient monitor  130  via connector port  833 . 
     Blood pressure monitor  602  can include various electronic components to allow the blood pressure monitor  602  to carry out its physiological measurement and/or monitoring functionality, while cradle  604  can include little or no electronic components and/or functionality. For example, blood pressure monitor  602  can include the various electronic components and/or functionality as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. As discussed in more detail below, blood pressure monitor  602  and cradle  604  can include various features which allow for the either or both to be removably secured to one another. Such removable securement can advantageously allow the cradle  604  to remain attached to the patient  111  and/or cuff  737  while the blood pressure monitor  602  is removed away from the patient  111  and/or cuff  737 . This can be especially helpful where it is desirable to temporarily remove the blood pressure monitor  602  to charge and/or repair the blood pressure monitor  602 . This can also allow a caregiver to clean the cradle  604  and/or regions of the patient  111  proximate the cradle  604  without risking damage to the blood pressure monitor  602  (or various components thereof). 
       FIGS. 6A-6D  illustrate various view of blood pressure monitor assembly  600  where the blood pressure monitor  602  and the cradle  604  are in an assembled or secured configuration. As shown and as further discussed below, the cradle  604  can secure to the blood pressure monitor  602  (and vice versa) by securement between one or more sides or ends of the blood pressure monitor  602  and one or more sides or ends of the cradle  604 . For example, a first end of the cradle  604  can secure to a first end of the blood pressure monitor  602  and/or a second end of the cradle  604  (opposite the first end of the cradle  604 ) can secure to a second end of the blood pressure monitor  602  (opposite the first end of the blood pressure monitor  602 ). The securement of the blood pressure monitor  602  by the cradle  604  can advantageously prevent movement and/or rotation of the blood pressure monitor  602  relative to the cradle  604  along an axis running through a length, width, and/or height of the blood pressure monitor  602  and/or cradle  604 . 
       FIGS. 6F-6O  illustrate various views of the blood pressure monitor  602  of blood pressure monitor assembly  600 . As shown, blood pressure monitor  602  can include a first end  610 , a second end  612  opposite the first end  610 , a first side  613 , and a second side  615  opposite the first side  613 . The first end  610  can include a connector port  616 , which, as discussed above, can connect to a connector and/or cable such as connector  105   a  and cable  105 . While the present disclosure refers to “end” or “side”, such terminology is not intended to be limiting, but rather, is employed for mere convenience in differentiating certain features of the blood pressure monitor  602 . Accordingly, while the term “end” is used for the first and second ends  610 ,  612 , it is to be understood that such ends  610 ,  612  can also represent “sides” of the blood pressure monitor  602 . Connector port  616  can protrude outward from a surface of the first end  610 . First end  610  can additionally or alternatively include a connector port  614  which can be spaced from the connector port  616  along a surface of the first end  610 . As also discussed above, connector port  614  can connect to a cable  107 . Connector port  614  can protrude outward from a surface of the first end  610 . Connector port  614  can protrude outward from the first end  610  a distance greater than the connector port  616  (see  FIGS. 6L-6M ). Connector port  614  can have a circular cross-section, a conical cross-section, among other shapes. Connector port  614  can have a cross-section that tapers (or decreases) from a first end of the connector port  614  that connects to the first end  610  of the blood pressure monitor  602  to a second end of the connector port  614  that is opposite from the first end of the connector port  614 . Connector port  616  can be positioned in a middle of the first end  610 . Connector port  614  can be positioned on either side of connector port  616  along the first end  610 . 
     As discussed above, blood pressure monitor  602  can include an opening  670  configured to connect and/or provide air to a pneumatic tube (such as hose  37 ). For example, blood pressure monitor  602  can have an opening  670  on a second end  612 , which is opposite the first end  610  of housing. Pneumatic opening  670  can be positioned in a middle of the second end  612  or in a different location on the second end  612 . Alternatively, opening  670  can be positioned on a different portion of the blood pressure monitor  602 , for example one of the sides  613 ,  615  of blood pressure monitor  602 . 
     Opening  670  can be sized and/or shaped to receive a portion of the cradle  604  as discussed above. For example, with reference to  FIG. 6T , opening  670  can be sized and/or shaped to receive all or a portion of port  672   b  extending from a wall  646  of cradle  604 . As further discussed below, port  672   b  can be rigid or non-rigid, and can have a length and/or cross-section that is sized to fit within the opening  670 . Blood pressure monitor  602  can be secured or partially secured to cradle  604  via connection between the port  672   b  and the opening  670 . For example, when the port  672   b  is received within opening  670 , the port  672   b  can prevent movement of the blood pressure monitor  602  with respect to the cradle  604  along a direction that is perpendicular to an axis running through a length of port  672   b  and/or an axis that is parallel to a length of the blood pressure monitor  602  between the first and second ends  610 ,  612 . 
     Blood pressure monitor  602  can include one or more features that help the blood pressure monitor  602  removably secure to the cradle  604 . For example, housing can include one or more depressions  622  that are recessed from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602  and are configured to engage a portion of the cradle  604 . Depression  622  can be positioned on a top surface  608  of blood pressure monitor  602  (see  FIGS. 6F-6G ). Depression  622  can be recessed from the top surface  608  by a depth  623  ( FIG. 6N ) and can extend along apportion of the top surface  608 . Depression  622  can be located along the top surface  608  and proximate or adjacent the second end  612 . As discussed further below, depression  622  can engage with a lip  646   a  of a wall  646  of cradle  604  and can be sized and/or shaped to receive the lip  646   a . The depth  623  of depression  622  can be equal or substantially equal to a thickness of lip  646   a  such that, when the lip  646   a  is positioned within the depression  622 , a surface of the lip  646   a  is flush with a region of the top surface  608  of blood pressure monitor  602  that is proximate to the depression  622  (see  FIG. 6C ). With reference to  FIGS. 6F-6G, 6J, and 6N , depression  622  can extend along a portion of a width of the blood pressure monitor  602  and can also extend along a portion of a length of the blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, where the width of the blood pressure monitor  602  is the distance between sides  613  and  615  of blood pressure monitor  602  (see  FIG. 6J ), depression  622  can extend along a portion of such distance, such as the entire distance, less than the entire distance, half the distance, less than half the distance, among other percentages or fractions of the distance. Additionally or alternatively, where the length of the blood pressure monitor  602  is the distance between the first end  610  and the second end  612 , depression  622  can extend along such length by a distance  625  (see  FIG. 6P ). Distance  625  can be equal or substantially equal to a length of the lip  646   a . Distance  625  can be a percentage of the length of the blood pressure monitor  602  between the first and second ends  610 ,  612 , such as 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 25%, less than 20%, less than 15%, less than 10%, or less than 5%, although other percentages, values, or ranges are possible in some cases. 
     Additionally or alternatively, the blood pressure monitor  602  can include one or more latch arm protrusions  618  that extend outward from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602  and are configured to engage and/or interact with one or more latch arms  648  of cradle  604 . For example, as shown in at least  FIGS. 6H-6K , blood pressure monitor  602  can include one or more latch arm protrusions  618  that extend or protrude outward from a surface of the first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602 . The one or more latch arm protrusions  618  can include, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or nine or more latch arm protrusions  618 . The number of latch arm protrusions  618  on the blood pressure monitor  602  can be equal to the number of latch arms  648  on the cradle  604 , such that each of the latch arm protrusions  618  are configured to engage, secure, cooperate, and/or interact with a respective one of the latch arms  648  of the cradle  604 . The blood pressure monitor  602  can include a first latch arm protrusion  618  that extends from a surface of the first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602  and a second latch arm protrusion  618  that extends from the surface of the first end  610 . The first and second latch arm protrusions  618  can be spaced from one another. The first and second latch arm protrusions  618  can be positioned on opposite sides of connector port  616  (where the blood pressure monitor  602  includes the connector port  616 ). 
     The one or more latch arm protrusions  618  can have a variety of shapes and/or cross-sections. For example, the one or more latch arm protrusions  618  can have a triangular shape, a square shape, a rectangle shape, a circular shape, among other shapes. As illustrated in  FIGS. 6L-6M , the latch arm protrusions  618  have a triangle shape, where a tip of the triangle shape is defines the free end (not connected to the blood pressure monitor  602 ) of the protrusions  618 . The one or more protrusions  618  can have a ramped or tapered configuration that enables them to move or slide passed a portion of the latch arms  648  while contacting the portion of the latch arms  648 . The one or more latch arm protrusions  618  can have a shape or cross-section that is sized and/or shaped to correspond to a sized and/or shape of the latch arms  648  or a portion thereof. For example, where the free ends of the latch arms  648  have triangular shaped or tapering tip  648   a  (see  FIGS. 6W-6X ), the latch arm protrusions  618  can also have a triangular shaped or tapering tip. In such configurations where the shape or cross-section of the latch arm protrusions  618  correspond to the shape or cross-section of the free ends of the latch arms  648 , the latch arm protrusions  618  can advantageously engage and/or secure to or with the free ends of the latch arms  648 . For example, with reference to  FIGS. 6C-6D , when an end of the blood pressure monitor  602  (such as first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602 ) is secured to an end of cradle  604  (such as end  640  of cradle  604 ), the one or more protrusions  618  can contact and pass over the tips  648   a  of the latch arms  648 , such that the tips  648   a  at least partially hold the protrusions  618  below (with reference to a vertical axis in the orientation shown in the  FIGS. 6C-6D ). 
     As discussed above, blood pressure monitor  602  can at least partially secure to cradle  604  via connection between the port  672   b  and the pneumatic opening  670 . One example of securing the blood pressure monitor  602  to the cradle  604  can involve securement of the second end  612  of blood pressure monitor  602  to end  642  of the cradle  604  by placing the opening  670  over and around the port  672   b . As the opening  670  is positioned over/around the port  672   b , the second end  612  of blood pressure monitor  602  can move or slide towards the wall  646  of the cradle  604  at the end  642 . Further, as the second end  612  of blood pressure monitor  602  moves towards the wall  646 , the first end  610  of the blood pressure monitor  602  can be moved towards the end  640  of the cradle  604  such that the first end  610  contacts or approaches the one or more latch arms  648 . Movement of the first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602  towards a top surface  638  of the cradle  604  and/or towards the one or more latch arms  648  can cause the one or more latch arm protrusions  618  of the blood pressure monitor  602  to contact and pass over the tips  648   a  of the latch arms  648  (see  FIG. 6D ). Such contact between the one or more latch arm protrusions  648  and the tips  648   a  of the latch arms  348  can include a snap-fit, friction-fit, or press-fit. When the first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602  is moved to contact the top surface  638  of cradle  604 , the latch arm protrusions  618  can be positioned below the tips  648   a  of the latch arms  648 , and the tips  648   a  can at least partially prevent movement of the latch arm protrusions  618  in a direction perpendicular to a plane of the top surface  638  of the cradle  604 , for example, in a direction parallel to axis  603  as shown in  FIG. 6D . If sufficient force is applied to the blood pressure monitor  602  and/or cradle  604  in such direction, the latch arm protrusions  648  can move passed (for example, above) the tips  648   a  of latch arms  648  so as to remove the first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602  from the end  640  of cradle  604 . Additionally, as discussed above, the cradle  604  can include a lip  646   a  on the wall  646  at end  642  of cradle  604  that can engage the depression  622  of the blood pressure monitor  602  and at least partially prevent movement of the blood pressure monitor  602  in a direction parallel to an extension of the wall  646  and/or perpendicular to the top surface  638 . 
     The lip  646   a  and depression  622  can work alongside (or as an alternative to) the latch arms  648  and latch arm protrusions  618  and/or the opening  670  and port  672   b  to removably secure the blood pressure monitor  602  with the cradle  604 . For example, when the opening  670  of the second end  612  of blood pressure monitor  602  is placed and/or moved over/around the port  672   b , the lip  646   a  can slide or be received in the depression  622 . Thus, the blood pressure monitor  602  and cradle  604  can include various features that enable removable securement. 
     The blood pressure monitor  602  and/or the cradle  604  can include one or more features that aid in the removal of the blood pressure monitor  602  from the cradle  604  (and vice versa). For example, as shown in at least  FIGS. 6F-6M , blood pressure monitor  602  can include one or more grips  620  which are configured to aid in the grip or handling of the blood pressure monitor  602  (or cradle  604  if secured to the blood pressure monitor  602 ) and/or the removal of the blood pressure monitor  602  from the cradle  604  (and vice versa). While the figures illustrate two grips  620 , the blood pressure monitor  602  can include a different number of grips  620 . For example, the blood pressure monitor  602  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more grips  620 . The one or more grips  620  can be located on various surfaces, ends or sides of blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, the one or more grips  620  can be located on one or both of sides  613 ,  615  of blood pressure monitor  602 . The blood pressure monitor  602  can include a first grip  620  positioned on a first side  615  and a second grip  620  positioned on a second side  613 . The two grips  620  on the sides  613 ,  615  can be aligned with one another. Alternatively, the two grips  620  can be non-aligned. One or both of the first grip  620  and the second grip  620  can be positioned alongside  613 ,  615  and closer to one of the ends  610 ,  612  of blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, the first and second grips  620  can be positioned along one of side  613 ,  615  and closer to the first end  610  than the second end  612 . Such placement can allow removal of the first end  610  from the end  640  of cradle. For example, such placement can allow removal of the latch arm protrusions  618  from the latch arms  648  (or tips  648   a  of latch arms  648 ). 
     Each of the one or more grips  620  can include a recess  620   a . The recess  620   a  can be recessed from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602 , for example, a surface of a side  613 ,  615  of blood pressure monitor  602 . The recess  620   a  can be rounded or non-rounded. Recess  620   a  can comprise a circular or partially circular shape (for example, when viewed from the view of  FIG. 4M , which shows an enlarged view of grip  620 ). Alternatively, recess  620   a  can comprise a different shape, for example a square, rectangle, triangle, pentagon, hexagon, heptagon, octagon, nonagon, decagon, among other shapes (for example, when viewed from the view of  FIG. 6R , which shows an enlarged view of grip  620 ). A surface of recess  620   a  can be smooth. Alternatively, a surface of the recess  620   a  can be rough. The recess  620   a  can be sized and/or shaped to receive a portion of a finger. For example, the recess  620   a  can be sized and/or shaped to receive a portion of a thumb, index finger, or other finger. As another example, with reference to  FIG. 6Q , the recess  620   a  can be shaped like a thumb or a fingernail such that sides of the recess  620   a  (such as the right and left sides showing in  FIG. 6Q ) are recessed less than a top and bottom of the recess  620   a  (given the orientation of  FIGS. 6L-6M ). Such sizing and/or shaping of the recess  620   a  can advantageously allow a user to better handle the blood pressure monitor  602  by positioning a portion of the user&#39;s finger within the recess  620   a . Such sizing and/or shaping of the recess  620   a  can also advantageously allow a user to remove the blood pressure monitor  602  from the cradle  604 . 
     Each of the one or more grips  620  can additionally or alternatively comprise a rim  620   b . As shown in at least  FIGS. 6L-6M and 6Q-6R , the rim  620   b  can extend or protrude outward from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, rim  620   b  can extend outwards from a surface of side  613 , side  615 , and/or ends  610 ,  612 . The rim  620   b  can extend outwards from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602  proximate or adjacent the recess  620   a . The rim  620   b  can extend outwards from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602  and around a portion of a perimeter of the recess  620   a . For example, rim  620   b  can extend around an entire perimeter of the recess  620   a . Alternatively, rim  620   b  can extend around less than the entire perimeter of the recess  620   a . For example, rim  620   b  can extend around 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, or 10% of the perimeter of the recess  620   a , although other percentages are possible. Rim  620   b  can extend around half or less than half the perimeter of the recess  620   a . Rim  620   b  can extend around ⅓ or less than ⅓ the perimeter of the recess  620   a . Rim  620   b  can extend around ¾ or less than ¾ the perimeter of the recess  620   a . Rim  620   b  can be positioned proximate or adjacent the recess  620   a  and between a top or bottom of the blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, blood pressure monitor  602  can include a top surface  608  (see  FIG. 6J ) and a bottom surface  609  (see  FIG. 6K ), and rim  32   b  can be positioned between recess  620   a  and the top surface  608 . Alternatively or additionally, rim  620   b  can be positioned in a different location with respect to the recess  620   a  and/or top and bottom surfaces  608 ,  609  of blood pressure monitor  602 . 
     Rim  620   b  can extend around a portion of the perimeter of recess  620   a  from a first end of the rim  620   b  to a second end of the rim  620   b  and rim  620   b  can have a length extending between the first and second ends. Rim  620   b  can extend outwards from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602  a variable distance along its length. Rim  620   b  can have a constant cross-section from the first end to the second end of the rim  620   b . Alternatively, rim  620   b  can have a variable cross-section along its length. Rim  620   b  can have a middle region positioned between the first and second ends of rim  620   b . Rim  620   b  can have a cross-section that increases from the first end of the rim  620   b  to the middle region of the rim  620   b  and/or that decreases from the middle region to the second end of the rim  620   b . Rim  620   b  can have a cross-section that increases from the first end to the second end or alternatively, that increases from the second end to the first end. The middle region of rim  620   b  can extend further outwards from a surface of the blood pressure monitor  602  than one or both of the first and second ends of the rim  620   b . The middle region of the rim  620   b  can align with a center of the recess  620   a . Rim  620   b  can have a circle shape, half-circle shape, square shape, rectangular shape, or another shape, for example, when viewed as shown in  FIG. 6R  which shows an enlarged view of a portion of a side  615  of blood pressure monitor  602 . 
     As another example, blood pressure monitor  602  can include a first rim  620   b  that extends at least partially outward from side  613  and a second rim  620   b  that extends at least partially outward from side  615 . The first rim  620   b  and the second rim  620   b  can align with each other, or alternatively, not align with each other. The first rim  620   b  and/or the second rim  620   b  can be positioned along sides  613 ,  615  and be closer to the first end  610 . 
     Rim  620   b  can advantageously act as a gripping point to allow a user to better handle or hold the blood pressure monitor  602 . Additionally, rim  620   b  can allow a user to remove the blood pressure monitor  602  from the cradle  604  when the blood pressure monitor  602  and cradle  604  are secured to one another. Rim  620   b  can act alone or alongside recess  620   a  in such manner. For example, recess  620   a  can be sized and/or shaped to receive a portion of a user&#39;s finger, and the user&#39;s finger can at least partially contact or press against a portion of rim  620   b  (such as the middle region of the rim). 
       FIGS. 6S-6Z  illustrate various views of cradle  604  which can secure to blood pressure monitor  602  as discussed above. Cradle  604  can include a first end  640 , a second end  642  opposite the first end  640 , a first side  643 , a second side  645  opposite the first side  643 , a top interior surface  638  between the sides  643 ,  645 , and a bottom surface  639  opposite the surface  638 . The top interior surface  638  and the bottom surface  639  can together define a base of the cradle  604  which can be configured to contact and/or secure to a patient, such as patient  111  and/or a cuff  737  wrapped around an arm of a patient  111 . For example, the base of the cradle  604  can include an adhesive or Velcro® configured to attach to a portion of a cuff  737 . The sides  643 ,  645  (also referred to herein as “sidewalls”) can extend outward from the base of the cradle  604  in a direction that is angled with respect to the base. For example, the sidewalls  643 ,  645  can extend generally perpendicularly from the base of the cradle  604 . 
     One or both of sidewalls  643 ,  645  can comprise one or more recessed cutouts  652  along a portion of the sidewalls  643 ,  645 . For example, as shown in at least  FIGS. 6S-6T , sidewall  643  can include a first recessed cutout  652  and sidewall  645  can include a second recessed cutout  652 . The first and second recessed cutouts on the sidewall  643 ,  645  can align with each other, or alternatively, not align with each other. The first and second recessed cutouts  652  can be positioned along the sidewalls  643 ,  645  and can be closer to the first end  640  of the cradle  604  than to the second end  642  of the cradle  604 . The one or more recessed cutouts  652  in one or both of sidewalls  643 ,  645  can be positioned along a portion of the sidewall(s)  643 ,  645  that is proximate or adjacent to the one or more grips  620  of the blood pressure monitor  602 , and therefore can provide access to the one or more grips  620  when the blood pressure monitor  602  and cradle  604  are secured to one another. Sidewalls  643 ,  645  can have a height that is equal to or less than a height of the blood pressure monitor  602 . The one or more recessed cutouts  652  can be rounded and/or smooth. The one or more recessed cutouts  652  can have a half-circle shape or another shape (such as half-square, half-rectangle, half-ellipse, half-triangle, among other shapes) (see  FIGS. 6W-6X ). 
     The cradle  604  can include one or more arms that are configured to secure to a portion of a cable or tube that may connect one or more sensor or monitors in a patient environment (such as the environment illustrated in  FIGS. 1A-1B ). For example, as shown in  FIGS. 6S-6Z , cradle  604  can include one or more arms  650  that are sized and/or shaped to receive, retain, and/or secure a portion of a cable, such as cable  105  and/or  35 . For example, the cradle  604  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more arms  650 . The one or more arms  650  can extend from the base defined by the bottom surface  639  and top surface  638 , sidewall  643 , and/or sidewall  645 , for example. As another example, the cradle  604  can include two arms  650  extending from or proximate to sidewall  643  and two arms  650  extending from or proximate to sidewall  645 . Respective ones of the two pairs of arms  650  in such configuration can be aligned with one another (see  FIG. 6U-6V ) or non-aligned. 
     The one or more arms  650  can extend outwards from a surface of the cradle  604  (such as a surface of the sidewalls  643 ,  354  in a first direction that is angled with respect to the surface. For example, the one or more arms  650  can extend generally perpendicularly with respect to a surface of the sidewalls  643 ,  645 . Additionally, the one or more arms  650  can extend in multiple directions. For example, the one or more arms  650  can extend in a first direction that is generally perpendicular to a surface of the cradle  604  and can extend in a second direction that is angled with respect to the first direction. The one or more arms  650  can extend from the cradle  604  and can curl in a first direction (for example, up or down in the orientation as shown in  FIGS. 6Y-6Z ). The one or more arms  650  can extend in one or more directions so as to define an open region therein. For example, the one or more arms  650  can curl as shown in  FIGS. 6Y-6Z  an define an open region that has a cross-section that is shaped like a half-circle. Alternatively, the open region can have a cross-section that is shaped differently, such as half-square, half-rectangle, triangle-shaped, among other shapes. The one or more arms  650  can curl in a direction such that an open region defined therewithin faces a direction away from or opposite a direction that the bottom surface  639  of the cradle  604  faces. Alternatively, the one or more arms  650  can curl in a direction such that an open region defined therewithin faces a same direction that the bottom surface  639  of the cradle  604  faces. The open region defined by the one or more arms  650  can be sized and/or shaped to receive, retain, and/or secure a portion of a cable or tube as discussed above. 
     As discussed above, cradle  604  can include one or more latch arms  648  which can engage and/or secure to the latch arm protrusions  618  of the blood pressure monitor  602 . The one or more latch arms  648  can extend from the first end  640  of cradle  604 . Additionally or alternatively, the one or more latch arms  648  can extend from a different portion of the cradle  604  (such as one or both of sidewalls  643 ,  645 ). Cradle  604  can include a first latch arm  648  extending from a portion of the cradle  604  at the first end  640  and a second latch arm  648  extending from a portion of the cradle  604  at the first end  640 . The first and second latch arms  648  can be spaced apart from one another. Where the first end  640  of the cradle  640  include two latch arms  648  and the first end  610  of blood pressure monitor  602  includes two latch arm protrusions  618 , the spacing between the latch arms  648  can be the same as the spacing between the latch arm protrusions  618 . Further, where the first end  640  includes two latch arms  648 , the two latch arms  648  can be spaced so as to accommodate a width of the connector port  616  of the blood pressure monitor  602  (where the housing includes such connector port  616 ). A midpoint between the spacing of the two latch arms  648  on the first end  640  can be aligned with a midpoint of the depression  622  of a length of the depression  622  when the blood pressure monitor  602  is secured to the cradle  604 . The one or more latch arms  648  can have a height or length that is less than a height of the blood pressure monitor  602  (see  FIG. 6D ). 
     The one or more latch arms  648  can have a first end that is connected to a portion of the cradle  604  and a second end opposite the first end that is free or cantilevered. As discussed above, the second, free end of the latch arms  648  can have a tip  648   a  (see  FIGS. 6W-6X ). Tip  648   a  can extend from the second, free end of the latch arm  648  in a direction that is non-parallel with respect a length of the latch arm  648  between the first and second ends of the latch arm  648 . For example, the tip  648   a  can extend generally perpendicular to the second end of the latch arm  648 . The tip  648   a  can extend from the second, free end of the latch arm  648  in a direction towards the second end  642  of cradle  604  and/or in a direction towards the wall  646  of cradle  604  (where the cradle  604  includes such wall  646 ). Tip  648   a  can be tapered or sloping, and as discussed above, can be configured to engage, contact, and/or slide passed latch arm protrusion  618 . 
     Cradle  604  can include a wall  646  extending from a portion of the cradle  604  and proximate, adjacent, or along the second end  642  of cradle  604 . For example, wall  646  can extend from the base of the cradle  604  which is defined by the top surface  638  and bottom surface  639  of cradle  604  (see  FIGS. 6S-6T ). Wall  646  can extend at an angle with respect to a plane of the base (such as a plane of the top and/or bottom surfaces  638 ,  339 ). For example, wall  646  can extend in a direction that is generally perpendicular to the top surface  638  of the cradle  604 . Wall  646  can have a first end that is connected to a portion of cradle  604  and a second end opposite to the first end and that is free or cantilevered. Wall  646  can have a length extending between the first, connected end and the second, free end. Wall  646  can have a height that is greater than a height of the one or more latch arms  648  (see  FIGS. 6W-6X ). With reference to  FIG. 6U , wall  646  can have a width extending along a portion of a width of the cradle  604  between the sidewalls  643 ,  645 . The width of the wall  646  can be less than the distance between sidewalls  643 ,  645 . Alternatively, the width of wall  646  can be equal to the distance between the sidewalls  643 ,  645 . 
     As discussed above, wall  646  can include a lip  646   a  configured to engage, secure, and/or fit within the depression  622  of the blood pressure monitor  602 . Lip  646   a  can extend in a direction that is non-parallel with respect to the length of the wall  646  between the first, connected end of the wall  646  and the second, cantilevered end of the wall  646 . For example, the lip  646   a  can extend generally perpendicular to the length of the wall  646 . Lip  646   a  can extend in a direction towards the first end  640  of the cradle  604 . Where the cradle  604  includes one or more latch arms  648  on the first end  640 , the lip  646   a  can extend in a direction towards the one or more latch arms  648 . The lip  646   a  can be sized and/or shaped to fit within a portion of the depression  622  of blood pressure monitor  602 . For example, the width, length, and/or thickness of lip  646   a  can be sized and/or shaped to match or substantially match the length, width, and/or depth of the depression  622 . When the lip  646   a  is received within and/or secured to the depression  622 , a top surface of the lip  646   a  can be flush with a region of the top surface  608  of blood pressure monitor  602  proximate or adjacent to depression  622 . 
     As discussed above, wall  646  can include one or more ports that extend from a portion thereof. As shown in at least  FIG. 6W , wall  646  can include a first port  672   a  that extends from a side or surface of the wall  646  and/or can include a second port  672   b  that extends from a side or surface of the wall  646 . The first port  672   a  can extend from an outer surface of the wall  646  in a direction away from one or both of the first end  640  and the second end  642 . The second port  672   b  can extend in a direction towards the first end  640  of the cradle  604 . The first port  672   a  can have a first length and the second port  672   b  can have a second length that is less than, equal to, or greater than the length of the first port  672   a . The first and second ports  672   a ,  672   b  can extend in opposite directions. As discussed above, the second port  672   b  can be sized and/or shaped to fit within the pneumatic opening  670  in blood pressure monitor  602 , and can at least partially secure the blood pressure monitor  602  within the cradle  604 . For example, when the port  672   b  is positioned within the opening  670 , the port  672   b  can prevent or reduce the likelihood of movement of the blood pressure monitor  602  with respect to the cradle  604  in a direction that is parallel to a distance between the sidewalls  643 ,  645  of the cradle  604 . 
     One or both of ports  672   a ,  672   b  can be cylindrical or non-cylindrical. One or both of ports  672   a ,  672   b  can have a cross-section that is circular, square, rectangular, or another shape. Port  672   b  can have a tapered or partially tapered (chamfered) tip (see  FIGS. 6W-6X ). such tapering or chamfer can help the free end of port  672   b  align with and/or be positioned within opening  670 . Port  672   a  can have a tapered or partially tapered free end. For example, port  672   a  can have a first end connected to the wall  646 , a second end opposite the first end, and a cross-section of the port  672   a  can vary along a length between the first and second ends. For example, port  672   a  can have a first cross-section near the wall  646  and a second cross-section near the free end. For example, port  672   a  can have a conically-shaped free end. Port  672   a  can be sized and/or shaped to secure to a tube, such as a pneumatic hose  637  as discussed above. One or both of ports  672   a ,  672   b  can be positioned along a height and/or width of wall  646 . For example, one or both of ports  672   a ,  672   b  can be positioned at or proximate a middle region of the wall  646 . 
     Port  672   a  can define a fluid passage and port  672   b  can define a fluid passage. Each of the fluid passages of the ports  672   a ,  672   b  can align with each other and also align with an opening in the wall  646 . In such configuration, when a pneumatic hose/tube  637  is secured to port  672   a , fluid (for example, air) can be pumped via blood pressure monitor  602  through opening  670 , fluid passage defined within port  672   b , an opening in the wall  646 , fluid passage defined with port  672   a , and the hose  37 . Such pumped air can be transmitted to a blood pressure cuff  121  as discussed above. 
     Cradle  604  can include one or more support walls  677  proximate or adjacent to the wall  646  that can provide support to the wall  646 . For example, cradle  604  can include a first support wall  677  that extends from the second end  642  of cradle  604  and connects to a first side edge of the wall  646  and a second support wall  677  that extends from the second end  642  of cradle  604  and connects to a second side edge of the wall  646 . 
     Cradle  604  can include a mechanism that can facilitate near field communication (NFC) with the blood pressure monitor  602  as discussed above. For example, as shown in at least  FIGS. 6U-6V , cradle  604  can include a prong  674  comprising an NFC tag that can communicate with a NFC reader of the blood pressure monitor  602 . Such NFC can be, for example RFID, and the prong  674  can include an RFID tag configured to communicate with an RFID reader of the blood pressure monitor  602 . As another example, the prong  674  can include a memory, such as an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) that can contact electrical contacts on a bottom surface of blood pressure monitor  602  when blood pressure monitor  602  is secured to cradle  604 . In such cases where the cradle  604  includes an NFC communication mechanism, blood pressure monitor  602  can transfer and/or collect data from the cradle  604 . For example, such NFC communication can enable the blood pressure monitor  602  and/or cradle  604  to: confirm that either or both are compatible (e.g., not counterfeit); determine a lifespan (or remaining lifespan) of either component; and/or determine the size of a cuff to which the cradle  604  is attached. 
     As shown, prong  674  can connect to a portion of the cradle  604  (such as the base defined by the top and bottom surfaces  638 ,  339  of cradle  604 ). Prong  674  can extend from a portion of the base and extend and/or curl in a direction away from the base (such as in an upward direction given the orientation shown in  FIG. 6S ). Prong  674  can bias, contact, and/or press against bottom surface  609  of blood pressure monitor  602  when the blood pressure monitor  602  is secured within cradle  604 . Such biasing or pressure can help the blood pressure monitor  602  better engage portions of the cradle  604  and/or help in removal of the blood pressure monitor  602  from the cradle  604 . For example, prong  674  can cause the one or more latch arm protrusions  618  to contact and/or press against the latch arms  648  (or tips  648   a ) and/or can cause the depression  622  to contact and/or press against the lip  646   a . Prong  674  can be at least partially positioned within an opening  675  in the base of the cradle  604  that extend through the top and bottom surfaces  638 ,  339  (see  FIGS. 6U-6V ). 
       FIGS. 7A-7U  illustrate various views and aspects of an alternative design for a blood pressure monitor assembly  700  which includes an alternative design for a blood pressure monitor  702  and also includes a cradle  704 . While the device  702  is referred to herein as a “blood pressure monitor” or “blood pressure device” herein, device  702  can measure and/or monitor other parameters in addition or as an alternative to blood pressure. For example, device  702  can measure and/or monitor the concentration or partial pressure of carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) in exhaled air of the patient. Blood pressure monitor  702  can have the characteristics and/or functionality as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/850,948, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. 
     Blood pressure monitor assembly  700  can be the same in some or many respects to blood pressure monitor assembly  600  as described above. For example, blood pressure monitor  702  can be identical to blood pressure monitor  702  except for one or more of the differences discussed below. As another example, one or both of blood pressure monitor  702  and/or cradle  704  can be the same in some or many respects as the blood pressure monitor  602  and/or cradle  604  as shown and described above. Aspects or features of blood pressure monitor  702  can be combined and/or replaced with aspects or features of blood pressure monitor  602 , and vice versa, without departing from the scope of this disclosure. Accordingly, numerals used in  FIGS. 6A-6Z  with respect to blood pressure monitor  602  and cradle  604  are similar to numerals used in  FIGS. 7A-7V  to denote similar features. The discussion that follows below with reference to  FIGS. 7A-7V  is intended to convey some additional and/or different features or aspects of blood pressure monitor  702  with respect to blood pressure  602 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 7A , blood pressure monitor assembly  700  can include a blood pressure monitor  702  that can removably secure to cradle  704  in a similar or identical way in which housing  602  and cradle  604  can removably secure as described above. For example, as discussed above with reference to wall  646 , lip  646   a , one or more latch arms  648 , tip(s)  648   a , depression  622 , protrusion(s)  618  of blood pressure monitor  602  or cradle  604 , blood pressure monitor  702  or cradle  704  can include wall  746 , lip  746   a , one or more latch arms  748 , tip(s)  748   a , depression  722 , protrusion(s)  718  which can behave in the similar or identical way in order to removably secure blood pressure monitor  702  to cradle  704 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 7B-7I , blood pressure monitor  702  can include ends  712 ,  710 , top surface  708 , bottom surface  709 , sides  713 ,  715 , connector port  714 , opening  770 , grip(s)  720 , protrusions  718 , connector port  716 , each of which can be the same in some, many, or all respects as ends  612 ,  610 , top surface  608 , bottom surface  609 , sides  613 ,  615 , connector port  614 , opening  670 , grip(s)  620 , protrusions  618 , connector port  616  as shown and described above with reference to blood pressure monitor  602 . While the present disclosure refers to “end” or “side”, such terminology is not intended to be limiting, but rather, is employed for mere convenience in differentiating certain features of the blood pressure monitor  702 . Accordingly, while the term “end” is used for the first and second ends  712 ,  710 , it is to be understood that such ends  712 ,  710 , can also represent “sides” of the blood pressure monitor  702 . 
     Additionally or alternatively, as shown in  FIGS. 7N-7U , cradle  704  can include ends  740 ,  742 , sides  743 ,  745 , ports  772   a ,  772   b , recessed cutouts  752 , top surface  738 , and/or bottom surface  739 , each of which can be the same in some, many, or all respects as ends  640 ,  642 , sides  643 ,  645 , ports  672   a ,  372   b , recessed cutouts  652 , top surface  638 , and/or bottom surface  334 , as shown and described elsewhere herein. 
     As shown in at least  FIG. 7C , blood pressure monitor  702  can include a visual indicator  799  that can indicate whether the blood pressure monitor  702  is on or off, whether the blood pressure monitor  702  and the cradle  704  are not compatible with each other (for example, via NFC communication between the blood pressure monitor  702  and the cradle  704  discussed below), battery life of the blood pressure monitor  702 , among other things. The indicator  799  can be an LED indicator. In some cases, LED indicator is configured to flash and/or blink to indicate one or more of the above listed scenarios. 
     One optional difference between the cradle  604  and the cradle  704 , with reference to  FIGS. 6S-6V and 7N-7Q , is that cradle  704  can have no opening  675  and/or no prong  674  like that shown with respect to cradle  604 . In some cases, blood pressure monitor  702  and cradle  704  can communicate with one another via near field communication protocols, such as radio frequency protocols. For example, blood pressure monitor  702  can include a radio frequency identification reader and cradle  704  can include an NFC tag  793  (such as an RFID tag) shown in dotted lines in  FIG. 7P . For example, blood pressure monitor  702  can include an RFID reader which can be positioned within an interior of blood pressure monitor  702 , such as on a printed circuit board of the blood pressure monitor  702 . In such scenario, cradle  604 ,  704  can include an RFID tag  393 , in the form of a sticker or label, for example, that can transmit a signal in response to recognition of a radio frequency signal from the RFID reader in the blood pressure monitor  702 . Such RFID tag  393  can be on a surface of the cradle  704 , for example, on a bottom surface  739 , of cradle  704 . Such RFID tag  393  can be, for example, sandwiched and/or covered by a hook and loop securement patch adhered to the bottom surface  739 . Alternatively, cradle  704  can include an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) which can communicate (for example, transfer information or data) to the blood pressure monitor  702  via touching with an electrical contact on a surface of blood pressure monitor  702 . Whether the blood pressure monitor  702  and cradle  704  include RFID or EPROM features and functionality, these components can communicate with one another to transfer information and/or data, such as the amount of lifespan of the blood pressure monitor  702  and/or the cradle  704  remaining (which can be predetermined), whether the blood pressure monitor  702  and cradle  704  are compatible (e.g., whether a counterfeit or unauthorized product is being used), among other things. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 7B-7D and 7F-7H , blood pressure monitor  702  can include a depression  722  that is the same in some or many respects as depression  622  in blood pressure monitor  602 . Depression  722  can have a depth  723  ( FIG. 7H ) that is equal to depth  623  as shown and described elsewhere herein with respect to blood pressure monitor  602 . As can be seen in  FIGS. 7B-7D and 7F-7H , depression  722  can be the same as depression  622  in every respect except the length by which the depression  722  extends along the top surface  708  of blood pressure monitor  702 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 7D , depression  722  can extend along a top surface  708  of blood pressure monitor  702  along an entire width of end  712  and portion(s) of the top surface  708  along one or both sides  713 ,  715  of blood pressure monitor  702 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 7N-7U , cradle  704  can include a wall  746  (also referred to herein as “back wall”) that can be similar to wall  646  of cradle  604  in some or many respects. For example, with reference to  FIGS. 7N-7O , back wall  746  can extend upward from bottom surface  739  and/or top surface  638  and can extend along an entire width of end  742  of cradle  704 . Additionally, back wall  746  can extend from bottom surface  739  and/or top surface  638  and can extend along portion(s) of sides  743 ,  745  of cradle  604 . Similarly, back wall  746  can include a lip  746   a  that extends along a free end of back wall  746  in similar fashion as back wall  746 . 
     The securement of blood pressure monitor  702  and cradle  704  can be the same in some, many, or all respects as the securement of housing  602  and cradle  704  discussed above. For example, the blood pressure monitor  702  can be secured to cradle  704  by engagement of the back wall  746  and/or lip  746   a  with end  712  and/or depression  722 , and/or by engagement of port  772   b  within opening  770 , and/or by engagement of the one or more latch arms  748  with protrusions  718 . Similarly, blood pressure monitor  702  can include grips  720  that are similar in some, many, or all respects to grips  620  of blood pressure monitor  602  which enable a user to grip the blood pressure monitor  702  and remove the blood pressure monitor  702  from cradle  704 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 7N-7U , cradle  704  can include arms  750  that are configured to secure to a portion of a cable or tube that may connect one or more sensor or monitors in a patient environment (such as the environment illustrated in  FIGS. 1A-1B ). Arm(s)  750  can be the same as arms  650  of cradle  604  in some or many respects. As shown in at least  FIGS. 7N-7U , arms  750  can include a first end that connects to a portion of the cradle  704  and a second, free end. The second, free end of arms  750  can include a protrusion  750   a  that extend in a direction that is not parallel (for example perpendicular) with respect to the free end. In some cases, where the arms  750  curl as shown in  FIGS. 7T-7U , the protrusion  750   a  of arms  750  can extend towards an interior of cradle  704 , for example, towards sides  743 ,  745  (see  FIGS. 7N-7O ). Such protrusion  750   a  can help provide additional securement to a portion of a cable that is positioned in a space defined by the shape (for example, “curl”) of arms  750 . For example, a portion of a cable can be pushed into such space passed such protrusion  750   a , and can be at least partially secured between a portion of the protrusion  750   a  and an inner surface of arms  750 . While protrusion  750   a  is shown and described with respect to cradle  704 , arms  650  of cradle  604  can include protrusion  750   a.    
     As shown in  FIGS. 7P-7Q , arms  750  can include an opening through a portion thereof. Such opening can help in removal of a portion of a cable from an arm  750 . For example, where a portion of a cable is secured by arm  750 , a user can partially insert the user&#39;s finger or another object through the opening and push on the portion of the cable so as to aid removal. While such opening is shown and described with respect to arms  750 , arms  650  can also have such opening. 
       FIG. 7I  illustrates a connector port  716 , which can be the same in some or many respect to connector port  616  of blood pressure monitor  602 . Connector port  716  can be identical to connector port  616  of blood pressure monitor  602  except with respect to the number and/or arrangement of female prong openings and/or slots or recesses (see  FIG. 7I  and  FIG. 6O ). Connector port  716  can connect to a cable (or a connector thereof), such as connector  105   a.    
     Blood pressure monitor  702  can include one or more air intakes which can be in fluid communication with ambient air and can be configured to allow ambient air to flow into the interior of blood pressure monitor  702  and/or to one or more pumps within the blood pressure monitor  702 , such as pumps discussed elsewhere herein. Such air intakes can also allow air to flow out from the interior of the blood pressure monitor  702  into the ambient, such as when the blood pressure monitor  702  is facilitating deflation of a connected cuff. The one or more pumps can create suction to draw ambient air into and/or through such air intake(s) of blood pressure monitor  702 . Such air intake(s) can be located and/or positioned in a variety of locations on the blood pressure monitor  702 , for example, sides, ends, and/or top or bottom surfaces of blood pressure monitor  702 . Blood pressure monitor  702  can include one, two, three, four, five, or six or more air intakes. For example, blood pressure monitor  702  can include an air intake located along a side  713 ,  715  of blood pressure monitor  702 . 
       FIGS. 7J-7M  illustrate an example of an air intake  721  in blood pressure monitor  702 . While these figures and the discussion below describe air intakes  721  with reference to blood pressure monitor  702 , such discussion is equally applicable to blood pressure monitor  602 . As shown in  FIGS. 7B-7C and 7J-7M , blood pressure monitor  702  can include a grip  720  comprising a recess  720   a  and a rim  720   b , each of which can be the same in some, many, or all respects as grip  620 , recess  620   a , and/or rim  620   b  discussed above. Thus, the discussion with reference to grip  620 , recess  620   a , and/or rim  620   b  is equally applicable to grip  720 , recess  720   a , and/or rim  720   b . Air intake  721  can include one or more openings in an exterior portion (for example, a side of blood pressure monitor  702 ) and/or an interior portion (for example, an inner wall of the blood pressure monitor  702 ). For example, with reference to  FIGS. 15F-15G , the opening in the exterior portion can be an opening in a side  713 ,  715  of blood pressure monitor  702 , and such opening can comprise a slit  720   c  along a portion of the side  713 ,  715 . Slit  720   c  can extend adjacent and/or along a portion of a perimeter of recess  720   a . For example, slit  720   c  can extend adjacent and/or along less than ¾, less than ½, less than ¼, less than ⅙, or less than ⅛ of a perimeter or recess  720   a , or any value therebetween, or any range bounded by any combination of these values, although values outside these values or ranges can be used in some cases. As another example, slit  720   c  can extend adjacent and/or along at least ⅛, at least ⅙, at least ¼, at least ½, or any value therebetween, or any range bounded by any combination of these values, although values outside these values or ranges can be used in some cases. In some cases, the slit  720   c  is positioned along a portion of the perimeter of the recess  720   a  that is opposite the rim  720   b . For example, the slit  720   c  can be positioned closer to a bottom of blood pressure monitor  702  than recess  720   a  and/or rim  720   b . Slit  720   c  can be positioned closer to a bottom surface of blood pressure monitor  702  than to a top surface of blood pressure monitor  702 . 
       FIG. 7K  illustrates a cross-section through blood pressure monitor  702  along the dotted line as shown in  FIG. 7D .  FIG. 7K  illustrates, in part, slit  720   c . As shown, air can flow through slit  720   c  and/or around a portion of a perimeter of recess  720   a , above and/or adjacent to a wall  720   g , into and/or through a first chamber  720   d , into and/or through a second chamber  720   e , into and/or through a chamber or opening  720   f , and into an interior of blood pressure monitor  702  and/or into one or more pumps as discussed elsewhere herein. Where the slit  720   c  extends along a perimeter of recess  720   a , wall  720   g  and/or chamber  720   d  can also extend along, adjacent to, and/or behind the recess  720   a  (or a portion of recess  720   a ) so as to collect the air flowing in and along an entire length of slit  720   c . As shown, wall  720   g  can extend upward (for example, in a direction towards the top surface of blood pressure monitor  702 ) above slit  720   c . As shown in  FIG. 7K , blood pressure monitor  702  can include an inner wall  720   h  that is positioned closer to an interior of blood pressure monitor  702  than side  713 ,  715  and/or slit  720   c . As also shown, the chamber  720   f  can extend through inner wall  720   h.    
       FIGS. 7L-7M  illustrate enlarged perspective views of a portion of a cross-section through blood pressure monitor  702 . The cross-section as shown in  FIG. 7L  is oriented differently than the cross-section as shown in  FIG. 7K  so as to better illustrate opening  720   f  With reference to  FIG. 7D , the cross-section shown in  FIG. 7L  is spaced further to the “right” than the cross-section line “ 7 K” shown in  FIG. 7D . The cross-section shown in  FIG. 7M  is also spaced away from the cross-section as shown in  FIG. 7K  so as to better illustrate chamber  720   e . As shown, chamber  720   e  can extend upward (for example, in a direction towards a top surface of blood pressure monitor  702 ) to the chamber  720   f  With reference to  FIGS. 7K-7L , chamber or opening  720   f  can extend transverse (for example, perpendicular) to chamber  720   e  and be open and/or adjacent to an interior of blood pressure monitor  702 . 
     Advantageously, the structure, arrangement, and/or configuration of air intake  721  can prevent or reduce the likelihood that liquids will intrude an interior of blood pressure monitor  702  and cause damage to the electrical and/or mechanical components therein. For example, with reference to  FIG. 7K , for liquids to get into an interior of blood pressure monitor  702  via slit  720   c , such liquids would have to pass through slit  720   c , pass upward (defying gravity) along and/or above wall  720   g , in and/or through chambers  720   d ,  720   e , and pass through chamber  720   f  of inner wall  720   h . In a typical patient care environment, the likelihood of liquids traveling through the air intake  721  in such manner is low, especially where blood pressure monitor  702  is secured to cradle  704  on a cuff similar to that shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B . 
       FIG. 7V  illustrates how cradle  704  can connect with an example blood pressure cuff  737  via a tube or hose, such as pneumatic hose  637  discussed and shown previously. As discussed previously, an end of hose  637  can be fluidly connected to an interior of cuff  737  and an end of hose  637  can secure to port  772   a  of cradle  704  such that, when port  772   b  is positioned within opening  770  of blood pressure monitor  702 , blood pressure monitor  702  can be in fluid communication with the interior of cuff  737 . Cuff  737  can be secured to a portion of a patient&#39;s body, such as an arm, thigh, or other portion. For example, cuff  737  can be secured to an arm of patient  111  as shown by cuff  121  in  FIG. 1A-1B . 
     Patient Monitor 
       FIGS. 8A-8V  illustrate various views and aspects of an assembly  800  which can include patient monitor  130  and a cradle  804 . Patient monitor  130  can be a fully functional, stand-alone monitor capable of various physiological measurements. Patient monitor  130  can be small and light enough to comfortably be secured to and carried around on an arm of a patient, for example, via a fastening strap  131  (see  FIG. 1A-1B ). 
     As discussed above, patient monitor  130  can connect one or more sensors or monitors in a patient environment. For example, as illustrated in  FIGS. 1A-1B , patient monitor  130  can connect to blood pressure monitor  120 , acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , and/or optical sensor  140 . Patient monitor  130  can connect to blood pressure monitor  120  via cable  107  and connector  107   a . While the discussion below with reference to  FIGS. 8A-8V  and patient monitor  130  may reference ECG device  110  and/or blood pressure monitor  120 , the discussion below is equally applicable to ECG device  310  and blood pressure monitors  600 ,  700 . For example, patient monitor  130  can connect to and/or interact with to ECG device  310  and blood pressure monitors  600 ,  700  in an identical or similar way as to ECG device  110  and blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 8A , connector  107   a  of cable  107  can connect to connector port  833  on a first end or side of patient monitor  130 . Patient monitor  130  can additionally or alternatively connect to another sensor, for example, acoustic sensor  150 , via cable  103  and connector  103   a . In some cases, cable  103  can be coupled with a device that can measure a temperature of a user, thereby allowing patient monitor  130  to connect to (and obtain temperature data from) such temperature measurement device. Connector  103   a  can connect to connector port  833 . Connector port  833  of patient monitor  130  can have more than one connector which can allow it to connect to both of connectors  107   a  and  103   a . For example, with reference to  FIG. 8I , connector port  833  can have a first female connector port  830  and a second female connector port  832  spaced from one another and positioned within a perimeter of the connector port  833 . Patient monitor  130  can additionally or alternatively have a connector and/or connector port on another end or side of the patient monitor  130 . For example, as shown in at least  FIGS. 8A and 8H , patient monitor  130  can have a connector port  831  that can connect to a connector  109   a  and cable  109 . Cable  109  can connect to a physiological sensor or monitor such as optical sensor  140 . As shown, connector port  833  can be located on (and/or extending from) an end of patient monitor  130  that is opposite to an end of the patient monitor  130  that connector port  831  is located on (and/or extends from). Such configuration can prevent cable clutter and entanglements, especially where the patient monitor  130  is secured to a portion of a patient&#39;s body in between multiple sensors which are also secured to the patient, for example as shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B . Connector  107   a , connector  103   a , and/or connector  109   a  can be waterproof and can be easily sterilized to avoid contamination. 
     As discussed above, patient monitor  130  can store, process, transmit, transmit without processing, display, and/or display without processing the physiological information received from the one or more physiological sensors, such as from acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or optical sensor  140 . Patient monitor  130  is a processing device, and as such, can include the necessary components to perform the functions of a processing device. For example, patient monitor  130  can include one or more processors (such as one, two, three, or four processors which can be dedicated to processing certain physiological parameters and/or processing physiological information from certain sensors/devices), a memory device, a storage device, input/output devices, and communications connections, all connected via one or more communication bus. 
     As discussed above, patient monitor  130  can transmit physiological information received from one or more of the acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or optical sensor  140  to an external patient monitor that is located away from the patient  111 , such as external patient monitor  160 . The external patient monitor  160  can be, for example, a nurse&#39;s station, a clinician device, pager, cell phone, computer, multi-patient monitoring system, hospital or facility information system. An artisan will appreciate that numerous other computing systems, servers, processing nodes, display devices, printers, and the link can interact with and/or receive physiological information from the patient monitor  130 . 
     Patient monitor  130  can include a sensor interface (such as sensor interface  132 ) that is configured to receive physiological information from one or more of the acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or optical sensor  140 . The sensor interface of patient monitor  130  can pass the received physiological data to a processing and memory block (such as processing and memory block  134 ). The processing and memory block can include one or more processors configured to process the physiological data received from one or more of the acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or optical sensor  140  into representations of physiological parameters. The processing and memory block can include a plurality of processors that are independent dedicated to processing data from different physiological sensors (such as the acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or optical sensor  140 ). For example, the processing and memory block can include a first processor dedicated to processing data from the acoustic sensor  150 , a second processor dedicated to processing data from the blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or a third processor dedicated to processing data from the optical sensor  140 . The processing and memory block can include an instrument manager which may further process the received physiological parameters for display. The instrument manager may include a memory buffer to maintain this data for processing throughout a period of time. The memory buffer may include RAM, Flash, or other solid state memory, magnetic or optical disk-based memories, combinations or the same or the like. Patient monitor  130  can include a wireless transceiver (such as wireless transceiver  136 ). The wireless transceiver can wirelessly transmit the physiological information received from the external physiological sensors (such as the acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , and/or optical sensor  140 ) and/or parameters from the one or more processors and/or the instrument manager of the processing and memory block. The wireless transceiver can transmit received physiological data to an external device via a wireless protocol. The wireless protocol can be any of a variety of wireless technologies such as Wi-Fi (802.11x), Bluetooth®, ZigBee®, cellular telephony, infrared, RFID, satellite transmission, proprietary protocols, combinations of the same, and the like. 
     Patient monitor  130  can display one or more physiological parameters on a screen or display thereof. Patient monitor  130  can include a display (such as display  877  as shown in  FIG. 8D ), control buttons (such as an on-off button  834  shown in  FIG. 8I ), one or more microphones and/or one or more speakers for enabling audio communication and/or messages or alerts. Display  877  of patient monitor  130  can be a touch-screen. Patient monitor  130  can include a battery configured to provide power to the electronics within the patient monitor  130 . Patient monitor  130  can include a battery that is rechargeable. For example, as discussed elsewhere herein, patient monitor  130  can be configured to be charged from an external power source, such as charging station  1000  and/or charging cradle  1100 . 
     As shown in  FIGS. 8A-8C , the assembly  800  can include the patient monitor  130  and a cradle  804 . As discussed in more detail below, the patient monitor  130  and the cradle can be configured to removably secure to one another. As shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B , patient monitor  130  can secure to a patient  111 , for example, a forearm of patient  111 . For example, cradle  804  of patient monitor  130  include one or more legs  848  (also referred to herein as “strap hoops”) extending from a surface of the cradle  804  which define an opening sized to allow a fastening strap (such as strap  131 ) to fit within and/or pass through. After passing through the one or more legs  848  of cradle  604 , strap  131  can wrap around the patients arm (see  FIGS. 1A-1B ). In addition or as an alternative to the one or more legs  848 , the cradle  604  can include a hook-and-look attachment on a bottom surface thereof that allows the cradle  604  to secure to strap  131  and thus to the patient  111  and/or can include an adhesive (for example, a silicone adhesive) that allows the cradle  804  to secure to skin of the patient  111 . Advantageously, the patient monitor  130  can be removed from the cradle  604  before, during, and/or after the cradle  604  is attached to the patient  111  and/or strap  131 . This can be especially helpful where it is desirable to temporarily remove the patient monitor  130  to charge and/or repair the patient monitor  130 , which can house the electronics of the patient monitor  130 . This can also allow a caregiver to clean the cradle  804  and/or regions of the patient  111  proximate the cradle  804  without risking damage to the patient monitor  130  (or various components thereof). 
       FIGS. 8D-8I  illustrates various views of patient monitor  130 . Patient monitor  130  can include a top surface  808 , a bottom surface  809  opposite the top surface  808 , a first end  810 , a second end  812  opposite the first end  810 , a first side  813 , and a second side  815  opposite the first side  813 . As discussed above, patient monitor  130  can include one or more connector ports configured to connect to one or more cables, and in turn, to one or more physiological sensors and/or monitors. For example, patient monitor  130  can include a first connector port  833  on first end  810  and/or a second connector port  831  on second end  812 . 
     Connector port  833  can extend or protrude from a surface of the first end  810  (see, for example,  FIGS. 8D-8E ). Connector port  833  can have a width that is equal to or smaller than a width of the patient monitor  130  between the first and second sides  813 ,  815  (see  FIG. 8D-8E and 8H-8I ). Connector port  833  can have a height that is equal to or smaller than a height of the patient monitor  130  between the top and bottom surfaces  808 ,  809  of patient monitor  130  (see  FIGS. 8H-8I ). Connector port  833  can include one or more connector ports configured to connect to one or more cables. For example, as shown in  FIG. 8I , connector port  833  can include a first female connector port  830  and a second female connector port  832  spaced from each other and within a perimeter of the connector port  833 . The size and/or shape of the female connector ports  830 ,  832  can correspond to a size and/or shape of a cable connector to which it connects, such as cable connectors  107   a ,  103   a  shown in  FIG. 8A . Patient monitor  130  can include a control button to control various functionality. For example, patient monitor  130  can include an on-off button  834 . On-off button  834  can be located within the perimeter of the connector port  833 . As shown in  FIG. 8I , on-off button  834  can be positioned proximate to female connector ports  430 ,  832 . Connector port  833  can advantageously connect and obtain data from multiple physiological sensors simultaneously. For example, connector port  833  can connect and obtain data from the blood pressure monitor  120  from connector port  832 , and can also connect and obtain data from an acoustic sensor  150  from connector port  830 . As also discussed herein, the data obtained from blood pressure monitor  120  can include physiological data from the ECG device  110  and physiological data from blood pressure monitor  120 . 
     Connector port  831  can extend or protrude from a surface of the second end  812  (see, for example,  FIGS. 8F-8G ). Connector port  831  can have a width that is equal to or smaller than a width of the patient monitor  130  between the first and second sides  813 ,  815  (see  FIG. 8D-8G ). Connector port  831  can have a height that is equal to or smaller than a height of the patient monitor  130  between the top and bottom surfaces  808 ,  809  of patient monitor  130  (see  FIG. 8H ). Connector port  831  can include one or more connectors configured to connect to one or more cables. For example, as shown in  FIG. 8H , connector port  831  can include a connector within a perimeter of the connector port  833 . The size and/or shape of the connector(s) with the connector port  831  can correspond to a size and/or shape of a cable connector to which it connects, such as cable connector  109   a  shown in  FIG. 8A . Connector ports  833 ,  831  can be located on opposite ends of patient monitor  130  (for example, ends  810 ,  812 ) and can be aligned with each other or non-aligned with each other. For example, as shown in  FIGS. 8A-8B , connector ports  833 ,  831  can be aligned about an axis running through a center of the ports  833 ,  831  and along a length of the patient monitor  130  between the first and second ends  810 ,  812 . As also shown in  FIGS. 8A-8B , connector port  833  can have a width that is greater than a width of connector port  831  (the width being measured about an axis up-down in the view of these figures). Connector port  831  can protrude from a surface of the second end  812  a first distance and connector port  833  can protrude from a surface of the first end  810  a second distance. The first and second distances can be equal or unequal. For example, the connector port  831  can have a length that is greater than a length of connector port  833 . As discussed further below, the connector port  831  can be sized and/or shaped to secure within collar  850  of cradle  804  so as to secure the patient monitor  130  to cradle  804 . 
     Patient monitor  130  can include one or more electrical contacts  839  which allow charging of a battery of the patient monitor  130 . For example, as discussed further below, the electrical contacts  839  can mate or otherwise contact electrical contacts  1024  in charging station  1000  and/or electrical contact  1146  of charging cradle  1100 . 
     As discussed previously, patient monitor  130  can be removably secured to cradle  804 . As shown in at least  FIGS. 8D-8G , patient monitor  130  can include one or more locking tabs  822  and/or one or more buttons  820 . The one or more locking tabs  822  can secure to and/or within a portion of cradle  804 , such as openings  860  of cradle  804 . The one or more locking tabs  822  can be positioned along one or more of side  813 , side  815 , end  810 , end  812 , and/or another location of patient monitor  130 . The one or more locking tabs  822  can extend and/or retract within one or more openings in the patient monitor  130  that surround the locking tabs  822  (for example, one or more openings in a housing of the patient monitor  130 ). The one or more locking tabs  822  can be coupled to one or more buttons  820 , such that movement of the buttons  820  can cause the locking tabs  822  to move (for example, extend or retract). As an example, movement of a button  820  in a direction towards an interior of patient monitor  130  can cause a coupled locking tab  822  to retract in a direction towards the interior of the patient monitor  130 . Alternatively, movement of a button  820  in a direction towards an interior of patient monitor  130  can cause a coupled locking tab  822  to extend in a direction away from the interior of the patient monitor  130 . The one or more locking tabs  822  and the one or more buttons  820  can be positioned proximate and/or adjacent to one another. The one or more locking tabs  822  and/or the one or more buttons  820  can be positioned along one or both sides  813 ,  815  of patient monitor  130  and can be positioned closer to either end  810  or end  812 . For example, the one or more locking tabs  822  and/or the one or more buttons  820  can be positioned closer to the first end  810  than to the second end  812  and/or can be positioned closer to the connector port  833  than to the connector port  831 . 
     In some cases, patient monitor  130  and cradle  804  can communicate with one another via near field communication (NFC) protocols, such as radio frequency protocols. For example, patient monitor  130  can include an NFC reader and cradle  804  can include an NFC tag (such as an RFID tag). For example, patient monitor  130  can include an RFID reader which can be positioned within an interior of patient monitor  130 , such as on a printed circuit board of the patient monitor  130 . In such scenario, cradle  804  can include an RFID tag, in the form of a sticker or label, for example, that can transmit a signal in response to recognition of a radio frequency signal from the RFID reader in the patient monitor  130 . Such RFID tag can be on a surface of the cradle  804 , for example, on a bottom or top surface  808 ,  809  of cradle  804 . Alternatively, cradle  804  can include an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) which can communicate (for example, transfer information or data) to the patient monitor  130  via touching with electrical contacts  839  ( FIG. 8E ) on a surface of patient monitor  130 . Whether the patient monitor  130  and cradle  804  include RFID or EPROM features and functionality, these components can communicate with one another to transfer information and/or data, such as the amount of lifespan of the patient monitor  130  and/or the cradle  804  remaining (which can be predetermined), whether the patient monitor  130  and cradle  804  are compatible (e.g., whether a counterfeit or unauthorized product is being used), among other things. 
       FIG. 8Q  illustrates an enlarged view of a portion of the patient monitor  130  as shown in  FIG. 8G .  FIGS. 8R-8S  illustrate a locking tab  822  and a button  820  along with other corresponding structure associated with and/or connected to patient monitor  130 . As shown, locking tab  822  and button  820  can be coupled with a stem  823   a  which can extend between the locking tab  822  and the button  820 . Locking tab  822 , stem  823   a , and/or button  820  can rotate about a pivot point. For example, button  820  can connect to stem  823   a  on one side of button  820  and also to a stem  823   b  on an opposite side of button  820 . Stem  823   b  can connect button  820  to a pivot connector  825 . Pivot connector  825  can have a cylindrical cross-section (see  FIGS. 8U-8V ) or other cross-section. Pivot connector  825  can have a hollow or partially hollow interior (see  FIG. 8V ) that is sized and/or shaped to receive and/or secure to a pivot pin  893  extending from a portion of the patient monitor  130 . The pivot pin  893  can extend from a bottom portion of the patient monitor  130  underneath the pivot connector  825 . For example, with reference to  FIGS. 8R-8T , the pivot pin  893  can be positioned below and/or within the pivot connector  825 . 
     When positioned around and/or secured to the pivot pin  893 , the pivot connector  825  can be prevented from moving in a direction perpendicular to an axis extending through a length or height of the pivot pin  893  and/or the pivot connector  825  while also allowing the pivot connector  825  to rotate about such axis. Further, when positioned around and/or secured to the pivot pin  893 , the pivot connector  825  can allow the stem  823   b , button  820 , stem  823   a , and locking tab  822  to rotate about an axis extending through a height of the pivot connector  825 . 
     Pivot connector  825  can include a tip  825   a  extending from a portion of the pivot connector  825  (see, for example,  FIG. 8U ). For example, tip  825   a  can extend from a top surface of the pivot connector  825 . Tip  825   a  can be spaced inward from a perimeter of the top surface of the pivot connector  825 . Tip  825   a  can have a cylindrical cross-section or other cross-section. Tip  825   a  can be sized and/or shaped to fit within an opening or hollow chamber of the patient monitor  130  that is positioned above the tip  825   a . When tip  825   a  is secured and/or positioned within such opening or hollow chamber of patient monitor  130 , interior surfaces of the opening or hollow chamber can prevent movement of the tip  825   a  in a direction perpendicular to an axis running through a height or length of tip  825   a  while also allowing the tip  825   a  to rotate within the opening or hollow chamber. Thus, engagement between the pivot connector  825  and pivot pin  893  of the patient monitor  130  underneath the pivot connector  825  alone or in combination with the engagement between the tip  825   a  and an opening or hollow chamber of the patient monitor  130  above the tip  825   a  can support the stem  823   b , button  820 , stem  823   a , and locking tab  822  and allow such elements to rotate about an axis extending through the pivot connector  825  and/or tip  825   a . Such rotation can allow the locking tab  822  and/or button  820  to extend and/or retract farther or closer from an interior of the hosing  802 . 
     The locking tab  822 , stem  823   a , button  820 , stem  823   b , pivot connector  825 , and/or tip  825   a  can be positioned within a portion of patient monitor  130  proximate to a perimeter of patient monitor  130 . For example, with reference to  FIGS. 8R-8T , patient monitor  130  can include an inner wall  833  that defines a chamber sized and shaped to allow for the movement of the locking tab  822 , stem  823   a , button  820 , stem  823   b , pivot connector  825 , and/or tip  825   a . Inner wall  833  can connect to a first portion of a side or end of the patient monitor  130  and a second portion of a side or end of the patient monitor  130 . 
     With continued reference to  FIGS. 8R-8T , the chamber defined by the inner wall  833  can include one or more additional walls that engage or contact portions of the stem  823   a , button  820 , and/or stem  823   b . For example, the chamber defined by the inner wall  833  can include a wall  837  that extends generally perpendicular to a portion of the inner wall  833  and towards the stem  823   a . Wall  837  can include a recessed portion  837   a . Recessed portion  837   a  can have a smaller height than the remainder of wall  837 . Recessed portion  837   a  of wall  837  can be positioned underneath a portion of stem  823   a . The length of the recessed portion  837   a  can define a space or distance that the stem  823   a  can move within the chamber. For example, when a force is applied to button  820  in a direction towards an interior of patient monitor  130 , stem  823   a  can move (for example, pivot) towards wall  837  and above recessed portion  837   a  of wall  837 . Once stem  823   a  passes an end of recessed portion  837   a , stem  823   a  contact the remainder of wall  837  and is prevented from moving further inwards. Thus, the recessed portion  837   a  of wall  837  can define the distance by which the stem  823   a  and/or locking tab  822  can move into the interior of patient monitor  130 . Further, since stem  823   a  and/or locking tab  822  can be coupled to any or all of button  820  and/or stem  423 , recessed portion  837   a  of wall  837  can define the distance by which all of these elements can move into the interior of patient monitor  130 . 
     The chamber defined by the inner wall  833  can additionally or alternatively include a wall  835  that extends from inner wall  833 . As shown in  FIG. 8S-8T , wall  835  can extend from two portions of inner wall  833  at least partially towards button  820 . The distance between an outwards surface of wall  835  and button  820  can define a space or distance that the button  820  can move within the chamber. For example, when a force is applied to button  820  in a direction towards an interior of patient monitor  130 , stem button  820  can move (for example pivot) towards wall  835 . As shown in  FIGS. 8R-8T , the patient monitor  130  can include a biasing member  879  that is configured to bias the stem  823   b , button  820 , stem  823   a , and locking tab  822  towards an extended position. The biasing member  879  can be a spring or a prong. The biasing member  879  can be positioned and/or secured within or to a portion of the patient monitor  130 , for example, at least partially secured within a chamber defined between the inner wall  83  and the inner wall  835  (see  FIG. 8S ). The biasing member  879  can apply a force to the stem  823   b , button  820 , stem  823   a , and/or locking tab  822  or portions thereof to bias the locking tab  882  towards a position where the locking tab  822  is further from an interior of the patient monitor  130 . In some cases, when button  820  is pressed inward, the button  820  can depress the biasing member  879  such that the biasing member  879  and/or the button  820  contact the inner wall  835 . Accordingly, the inner wall  835  can prevent the button  820  from moving further inwards. 
     Thus, the wall  835  can define a distance by which the button  820  can move into the interior of patient monitor  130 . Further, since button  820  can be coupled with stem  823   b ,  823   a , and/or locking tab  822 , wall  835  can define the distance by which all of these elements can move into the interior of patient monitor  130 . 
     As shown in at least  FIGS. 8U-8V , locking tab  822  can extend outward from a surface and/or side of stem  823   a . Locking tab  822  can extend outwards from a first end of stem  823   a  that is opposite a second end of stem  823   b  that connects to button  820 . Locking tab  822  can have a height that is smaller than a height of stem  324   b  (see  FIG. 8U ). Locking tab  822  can have a extend from stem  823   a  a length such that a thickness of the stem  823   a  and the length of the locking tab  822  is equal or substantially equal to a portion of an end  820   a  of button  820  (see  FIG. 8V ). Locking tab  822  can have a tapered end. For example, as shown in  FIGS. 8U-8V , a free/cantilevered end of locking tab  822  can be tapered such that a surface of the free end faces a direction at least partially towards a bottom surface  809  of patient monitor  130 , cradle  804 , and/or strap  131  (when strap  131  is secured to cradle  804  and patient monitor  130 ). Such tapering can advantageously allow the free end of locking tab  822  to contact, pass, and/or slide over a portion of cradle  804  proximate to opening  860  of cradle  804 . For example, with reference to at least  FIGS. 8M-8N and 8U , the tapered end of locking tab  822  can contact and/or pass over the portion of cradle  804  that is above opening  860  when the patient monitor  130  is placed into the cradle  804 . In some cases, when patient monitor  130  is placed into cradle  804  from atop the cradle  804  (with reference to the view shown in  FIG. 8C ), the tapered end of locking tab  822  can contact and slide passed the portion of cradle  804  above opening  860  and such portion of cradle  804  can press locking tab  822  inwards. Once the locking tab  822  reaches the opening  860 , locking tab  822  can extend into and/or through opening  860 . Such “automatic” movement to an extended position can result from the biasing of the locking tab  822  and/or button  820  that is discussed above with reference to biasing member  879 . Once positioned within and/or through opening  860 , locking tab  822  can prevent or reduce movement of the patient monitor  130  with respect to the cradle  804  in a direction perpendicular to the bottom and/or top surfaces  809 ,  808  of patient monitor  130  and/or in a direction parallel with a length of patient monitor  130  between the first and second ends  810 ,  812 . In order to allow the patient monitor  130  to be removed from the cradle  804 , the button  820  can be pressed (for example, towards an interior of the patient monitor  130 ), thus rotating the locking tab  822  (and/or stem  823   a ,  823   b ) about the pivot described above and inward toward an interior of the patient monitor  130 . Such movement (for example, retraction) of the locking tab  822  towards the interior of patient monitor  130  can remove locking tab  822  from opening  860 , which in turn allows at least a portion of patient monitor  130  to be removed from cradle  804 . 
     Button  820  can be cylindrical or partially cylindrical, among other shapes. Button  820  can have a circular, square, rectangular, triangle, pentagon, hexagon, heptagon, octagon, nonagon, or decagon shape, among other shapes. Button  820  can have a tapered free end  820   a  (the end not connected to stems  823   a ,  823   b ). For example, as shown in at least  FIG. 8V , a free end  820   a  of button  820  can be tapered such that a portion or side of the free end  820   a  has a longer length than another portion or side of the free end  820   a . For example, a portion of the free end  820   a  of button  820  that is closer to the locking tab  822  and/or stem  823   a  can have a greater length and/or can extend further from stems  823   a ,  823   b  than a portion of the free end that is closer to the stem  823   b  and/or pivot connector  825 . Such tapering and/or length difference can advantageously provide better gripping of button  820  by a user. For example, when a user applies a force to button  820  in a direction towards an interior of patient monitor  130 , the stem  823   b , button  820 , stem  823   a , and locking tab  822  (also referred to herein as “locking tab assembly”) can rotate about pivot connector  825  and move towards the interior of patient monitor  130 . As such movement/rotation occurs, a user&#39;s finger may tend to slip off the free end  820   a  proximate the stem  823   a  and/or locking tab  822 . Thus, where free end  820   a  of button  820  is tapered as shown in  FIGS. 8U-8V , such tapering can help a user better engage the button  820  in order to retract and/or extend the locking tab  822  to removably secure the patient monitor  130  and cradle  804 . 
     Patient monitor  130  can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more locking tabs  822  and/or can include one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight or more buttons  820 . For example, patient monitor  130  can include a first locking tab  822  positioned on a first side  813  and a second locking tab  822  positioned on a second side  815  opposite the first side  813 . Additionally, patient monitor  130  can include a first button  820  positioned on first side  813  and a second button  820  positioned on second side  815 . The first locking tab  822  and first button  820  can be positioned proximate and/or adjacent to one another, and/or closer to first end  810  than to second end  812  of patient monitor  130 . The second locking tab  822  and second button  820  can be positioned proximate and/or adjacent to one another, and/or closer to first end  810  than to second end  812  of patient monitor  130 . The first locking tab  822  can be aligned with the second tab  822  and/or the first button  820  can be aligned with the second button  820 . 
       FIGS. 8J-8P  illustrate various views of cradle  804 . As discussed elsewhere herein, cradle  804  can removably secure to patient monitor  130 . Cradle  804  can include a first end  840 , a second end  842  opposite the first end  840 , a first sidewall  845 , a second sidewall  834  opposite the first sidewall  845 , a top surface  844 , and a bottom surface  846  opposite the top surface  844 . The top surface  844  and the bottom surface  846  can together define a base of the cradle  804 , from which sidewalls  454 ,  834 , and/or walls along first and second ends  840 ,  842  can extend. 
     As discussed above, cradle  804  can include one or more legs  848  (also referred to herein as “strap hoops”) configured to secure to fastening strap  131  as shown in  FIGS. 1A-1B . For example, cradle  804  can include one, two, three, or four or more legs  848 . Each of one or more legs  848  can extend from and connect to a first portion of cradle  804  and a second portion of cradle  804  spaced from the first portion so as to define an opening that is sized and/or shaped to receive a portion of strap  131 . For example, the distance between the first and second portions of the cradle  804  from which legs  848  extend from can be selected to match a width of strap  131 . As shown in at least  FIGS. 8K-8L , cradle  804  can include a first leg  848  extending from or proximate to sidewall  845  and a second leg  848  extending from or proximate to sidewall  834 . The first and second legs  848  can be aligned with each other or unaligned with each other. 
     One or both of sidewalls  843 ,  845  can comprise one or more recessed cutouts  852  along a portion of the sidewalls  843 ,  845 . For example, as shown in  FIGS. 8M-8N , sidewall  843  can include a first recessed cutout  852  and sidewall  845  can include a second recessed cutout  852 . The first and second recessed cutouts  852  on the sidewalls  843 ,  845  can align with each other, or alternatively, not align with each other. The first and second recessed cutouts  852  can be positioned along the sidewalls  843 ,  845  and can be closer to the first end  840  of the cradle  804  than to the second end  842  of the cradle  804  (see  FIGS. 8M-8N ). The recessed cutouts  852  in one or both of sidewalls  843 ,  845  can be positioned along a portion of the sidewall(s)  843 ,  845  that is proximate or adjacent to the one or more locking tabs  822  and/or one or more buttons  820  of the patient monitor  130 . For example, the one or more recessed cutouts  852  can be sized and/or shaped to at least partially surround button  820  when patient monitor  130  is secured to cradle  804 . Such location of the one or more recessed cutouts  852  can provide access to the one or more buttons  820  when the patient monitor  130  and cradle  804  are secured to one another. Sidewalls  843 ,  845  can have a height that is equal to or less than a height of the patient monitor  130  (see  FIG. 8B ). The one or more recessed cutouts  852  can be rounded and/or smooth. The one or more recessed cutouts  852  can have a half-circle shape or another shape (such as half-square, half-rectangle, half-ellipse, half-triangle, among other shapes) (see  FIGS. 8M-8N ). 
     As shown throughout  FIGS. 8J-8P  cradle  804  can include a collar  850  that is sized and/or shaped to receive, surround, and/or secure to a portion of patient monitor  130 . For example, collar  850  can be sized and/or shaped to receive, surround, and/or secure connector port  831  (or a portion thereof).  FIG. 8J  illustrates a perspective view of cradle  804  and collar  850 , while  FIGS. 8A-8C  illustrate how collar  850  can secure to connector port  831  of housing  403 . Cradle  804  can include a wall  836  (also referred to herein as “back wall”) along the second end  842  that extends from the base defined by the top and bottom surfaces  844 ,  846  of cradle  804 . Wall  836  can include an opening  836   a  (see  FIGS. 8O-8P ). Opening  836   a  can be positioned and/or aligned with a center of a width of the wall  836  or positioned in an alternative location. Collar  850  can extend or protrude outward from a portion of the wall  836 , for example, around and/or partially around a perimeter of opening  836   a . Collar  850  can extend in a direction that is non-parallel with respect to the wall  836 . For example, collar  850  can extend outward from the wall  836  in a direction generally perpendicular with respect to the wall  836 . Collar  850  can extend away from the wall  836  a distance or length. Collar  850  can extend in a direction away from the end  840  (see  FIGS. 8M-8N ). The length of the collar  850  can be equal or substantially equal to a length of connector port  831 . The width of the collar  850  can be equal or substantially equal to a width of connector port  831 . 
     Collar  850  can have a cross-section that is sized and/or shaped to match or partially match a cross-section of the connector port  831 . Collar  850  can have a rounded cross-section or non-rounded cross-section. Collar  850  can have a cross-section with a perimeter that is sized and/or shaped to surround a portion of the perimeter of the cross-section of the connector port  831  when secured thereto. For example, collar  850  can have a cross-section having a perimeter that is 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, or 20% of the perimeter of the cross-section of the connector port  831 , although other percentages are possible in some cases. Collar  850  can be sized and/or shaped to surround 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, or 20% of the perimeter of the cross-section of the connector port  831  when secured thereto. 
     Patient monitor  130  can be secured to cradle  804  in a variety of ways. For example, one method of securing patient monitor  130  to cradle  804  can be by first placing and/or securing connector port  831  on second end  812  of housing  602  such that connector port  831  is positioned through opening  836   a  and/or within collar  850  on second end  842  of cradle  804 . Placement and/or securement of connector port  831  into and/or through opening  829   a  and/or within collar  850  can be completed by insertion of connector port  831  along an axis running through a center of the opening  836   a  and/or collar  850  (for example, aligned with a length of cradle  804  between first and second ends  840 ,  842 ). Additionally or alternatively, connector port  831  can be inserted into and/or secured within collar  850  by placing port  831  into collar  850  along a direction that is perpendicular to the axis running through the center of collar  850 . Regardless of the direction of securement of connector port  831  to collar  850 , such securement can be a snap fit, friction fit, press fit, or another type of securement. After connector port  831  is secured within collar  850  (thus securing the second end  812  of patient monitor  130  to the second end  842  of cradle  804 ), end  810  of patient monitor  130  and end  840  of cradle  804  can be positioned proximate to and/or secured to one another. For example, end  810  of housing  804  can be moved toward top surface  844  and/or end  840  of cradle until the one of more locking tabs  822  engage with the opening  860  (which can be as described above). For example, after the connector port  831  is positioned within and/or through the opening  836   a  and/or collar  850 , another portion of the patient monitor  130  can be rotated and/or pivoted about the wall  836  such that the one or more locking tabs  822  engage with one or more openings  860 . 
     Such securement of the connector port  831  to the collar  850  prior to the securement of the locking tabs  822  to the openings  860  can be advantageous when the patient monitor  130  is secured to a patient in a manner such that the first end  810  of the patient monitor  130  and/or first end  840  of cradle  804  are positioned vertically above the second end  812  of the patient monitor  130  and/or second end  842  of cradle  804 . For example, in such vertical orientation, connector port  831  can be advantageously vertically supported by back wall  836 , opening  836   a , and/or collar  850  and a portion of patient monitor  130  (such as first end  810 ) can be moved so that the locking tab(s)  822  snap into openings  860 . 
     Example Graphical User Interfaces 
     As discussed above, the patient monitor  130  can receive a variety of physiological parameters from any or all of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , optical sensor  140 , and/or acoustic sensor  150 , among other devices that may be coupled to a user for measuring physiological parameters. As also discussed above, the patient monitor  130  can process and/or display physiological data and/or or information related to such data on a screen of the patient monitor  130 , such as display  877  discussed above.  FIGS. 10A-22B  illustrate various example graphical user interfaces that can be shown in such display  877 . Patient monitor  130  can include one or more processors configured to execute instructions (for example, stored in a storage device of the patient monitor  130 ) and/or a software application, which in turn can execute commands to enable the patient monitor  130  to, among other things, display any of such example graphical user interfaces on display  877 . 
     Each of the user interfaces shown includes one or more user interface elements or controls that can be selected by a user (for example, a user wearing the patient monitor  130  and/or a caregiver or separate user). The user interface elements shown are merely illustrative examples and can be varied in other embodiments. For instance, any of the user interface elements shown may be substituted with other types of user interface elements. Some examples of user interface elements that may be used include buttons, dropdown boxes, select boxes, text boxes or text fields, checkboxes, radio buttons, toggles, breadcrumbs (e.g., identifying a page or interface that is displayed), sliders, search fields, pagination elements, tags, icons, tooltips, progress bars, notifications, message boxes, image carousels, modal windows (such as pop-ups), date and/or time pickers, accordions (e.g., a vertically stacked list with show/hide functionality), and the like. Additional user interface elements not listed here may be used. 
     Further, the user interfaces shown may be combined or divided into other user interfaces such that similar functionality or the same functionality may be provided fewer or more screens. Moreover, each of the user interface elements may be selected by a user using one or more input options, such as a mouse, touch screen input (e.g., finger or pen), or keyboard input, among other user interface input options. Although each of these user interfaces are shown implemented in a display that can be display  877  of patient monitor  130 , the user interfaces or similar user interfaces can be outputted to and/or displayed on any computing device, including but not limited to a mobile phone, desktop, laptop, tablet, among others. 
       FIG. 10A  illustrates example user interfaces which display SpO 2 , respiration rate (RRa) (also referred to herein as “respiratory rate”), and systolic and diastolic blood pressure values. Such information can be measured and/or obtained by patient monitor  130  from optical sensor  140  and blood pressure monitor  120 .  FIG. 10B  illustrates that which is shown in  FIG. 10A  but also includes physiological information derived from the ECG device  110 , namely, heart rate data and ECG data along a timeline. This aggregation of physiological data on the user interface can assist in confirming a physiological data set is accurate allowing an observer to compare the signals in real time on the user interface.  FIGS. 10C-10F  illustrate user interfaces with similar physiological information as shown in  FIGS. 10A-10B .  FIGS. 10G-10H  illustrate user interfaces including SpO 2 , pulse rate (PR), respiration rate, perfusion index (PI), and pleth variability index (PVI).  FIGS. 10G-10H  can illustrate a view where only physiological data obtained and/or derived from the optical sensor  140  is displayed.  FIGS. 10I-10M  illustrate physiological information that can be obtained and/or derived from ECG device  110 , including but not limited to, heart rate, respiration rate, and/or a timeline illustrating ECG data.  FIG. 10L  illustrates how “tapping” on the ECG waveform can allow a user to rotate the view of the waveform left or right, and  FIGS. 11A-11B  illustrate example rotated views of such ECG waveform. 
       FIG. 12A-12D  illustrate example user interfaces that can include physiological data obtained and/or derived from the blood pressure monitor  120 , including but not limited to pulse rate, mean arterial pressure (MAP), systolic blood pressure, diastolic blood pressure, and a timeline or waveform illustrating a user&#39;s blood pressure over time. In some implementations, the user interface allows a user to pause the waveform to allow inspection, and further, to resume (e.g., “unpause”, or “play”) the waveform (see, e.g.,  FIGS. 12A-12B ). In some implementations, the time interval associated with the blood pressure waveform can be modified by the user, for example, such time interval can be 24 hrs or a greater or lesser time interval (e.g., 10 hrs, 8 hrs, 6 hrs, 4 hrs, 2 hrs, 1 hrs, 30 minutes, etc.). In some implementations, the user interface allows a user to “freeze” a view of one or more of the physiological parameters appearing in the user interface (e.g., pulse rate, systolic/diastolic blood pressure, MAP, etc.). 
       FIG. 13  illustrates an example user interface that can include physiological data obtained and/or derived from the ECG device  110 , including but not limited to temperature of the user. Advantageously, the user interface can display the user&#39;s temperature along a time interval (e.g., a temperature waveform). Such time interval can be 24 hrs or a greater or lesser time interval (e.g., 10 hrs, 8 hrs, 6 hrs, 4 hrs, 2 hrs, 1 hrs, 30 minutes, etc.). 
       FIGS. 14A-14B  illustrate example user interfaces that can illustrate a user&#39;s orientation and/or posture, for example, in a bed. The user&#39;s orientation and/or posture can be illustrated by a visual representation of the user&#39;s orientation in the bed and time in any given orientation can be represented with a color-coded graph. Such representations can be similar or identical in some or many respects to those described and/or illustrated in U.S. Pub. No. 2020/0113488, published Apr. 16, 2020, titled “Patient Monitoring Device With Improved User Interface,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. The user&#39;s orientation and/or posture can be determined based on motion sensor  210  of the ECG device  110 , a motion sensor of the patient monitor  130  (which can be identical to motion sensor  210  as described above), and/or a motion sensor of the blood pressure monitor  120  (which can be identical to motion sensor  210  as described above). 
       FIGS. 15A-15B  illustrate user interfaces including ECG data, heart rate data, respiration rate data, among other data.  FIGS. 15C-15N  illustrate various menus and/or menu interactions and alarm settings that can be included in example user interfaces of patient monitor  130 . 
       FIGS. 16A-16B  illustrate example user interfaces of patient monitor  130  that can incorporate changing monitoring modes of the patient monitor  130 , for example, from a continuous monitoring mode to a home monitoring mode which hides critical settings, thereby making the monitor  130  better suited for home use. 
       FIGS. 17A-18D  illustrate example user interfaces of patient monitor  130  that can allow testing of whether there is an air leak in the blood pressure monitor  120  and/or cuff  121  coupled thereto. In some situations, international standards for automated noninvasive blood pressure devices require maximum static pressure accuracy to be ±3 mmHg. As illustrated in  FIGS. 17A-18D , the patient monitor  130  can allow a test to be undertaken which can inspect static pressure of the blood pressure monitor  120  and compare with such standard. 
       FIGS. 19A-19U  illustrate various alarms/alerts that can be incorporated into user interfaces of a display of patient monitor  130 . A variety of alarms/alerts can be initiated when one or more physiological parameters exceed or fall below threshold values or standards. Such alarms/alerts can be based off physiological data obtained and/or derived from any or all of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , optical sensor  140 , and/or acoustic sensor  150 , among other devices that may be coupled to a user for measuring physiological parameters. The alarms/alerts can be audio alerts, visual alerts, and/or combinations of the same.  FIGS. 19C-19D  illustrate how an audio alert can be paused, for example, for a period of time (e.g., 2 minutes).  FIGS. 19E-19F  illustrate a visual alarm (represented by a red color coding) associated with a particular physiological parameter (heart rate), for example, exceeding a threshold value.  FIG. 19E  illustrates the visual alarm in an active mode,  FIG. 19F  illustrates the visual alarm in a minimized mode,  FIG. 19G  illustrates the visual alarm in a silenced mode, and  FIG. 19H  illustrates the visual alarm in a silenced, minimized mode.  FIGS. 19L-19N  illustrates a visual alarm (represented by a yellow color coding) associated with a particular physiological parameter (SpO 2 ), for example, greater than but close to a threshold value (e.g., 88). 
     Advantageously, as illustrated in  FIGS. 19Q-19T , a display of patient monitor  130  can illustrate (via a user interface) visual alerts associated with a plurality of physiological parameters obtained and/or derived from one or more of ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , optical sensor  140 , and/or acoustic sensor  150 , simultaneously, even where there is limited viewable “real estate” on the display. This is especially beneficial given that patient monitor  130  (which can be secured to an arm or wrist of a user) is somewhat constrained in size. As shown, the user interface can illustrate that physiological parameters obtained and/or derived from the optical sensor  140  (referred to as “Pulse Ox” in figures) are below or above thresholds, physiological parameters obtained and/or derived from the ECG device  110  are above a threshold, and/or physiological parameters obtained and/or derived from the blood pressure monitor  120  are above a threshold. Additionally, with reference to  FIG. 19T , the user interface can display an alert that a fall has been detected, for example, based on data obtained and/or derived from motion sensors of the ECG device  110 . Additionally,  FIGS. 19Q-19T  may be applicable in instances of Telemedicine or emergencies as the aggregation of physiological parameters may be readily communicated to medical personnel. Also, in instances where an alarm is raised, the user interface may be captured, such as in a screenshot, and communicated to a doctor which can aid in diagnosing the user.  FIG. 29U  illustrates a colored bar that can represent a minimized view of one or more visual alarms. In some cases, alarms associated with a single type of physiological parameter can be generated based on data obtained and/or derived from two or more different physiological measurement devices (e.g., other than the patient monitor  130 ), and the alarms can be displayed simultaneously. For example, with reference to  FIG. 19T , the user interface can display a visual alarm associated with a user&#39;s pulse rate being above a threshold based on data obtained from ECG device  110  and simultaneously display a visual alarm associated with the user&#39;s pulse rate being above the threshold based on data obtained from the blood pressure monitor  120 . 
       FIGS. 20A-20B  illustrate various example user interfaces of patient monitor  130  that can incorporate features that can allow certain content to be locked and/or unlocked. 
       FIGS. 21A-21B  illustrate example user interface that can display information obtained and/or derived from ECG device  110 . 
       FIGS. 22A-22B  illustrate additional example user interfaces that can display alarms/alerts similar to those discussed above. 
     Cable Management Prongs 
       FIGS. 9A-9C  illustrate various views of a cable management prong  900  (also referred to herein as “cable securement prong” “cable prong” and “prong”). One or more cable prongs  900  can be utilized alongside any or all of the sensors, monitors, cables, and/or tubes discussed herein. For example, one or more cable prongs  900  can be used within patient monitoring system  100  and can be used alongside acoustic sensor  150 , ECG device  110 , blood pressure monitor  120 , patient monitor  130 , optical sensor  140 , cable  103 ,  105 ,  107 , and/or  109 . One or more cable prongs  900  can advantageously secure to one or more portions of cables  103 ,  105 ,  107 , and/or  109 . As discussed above, where patient monitoring system  100  includes multiple physiological sensors and such sensors are connected via cables, such cables can interfere with a patient&#39;s ability to move and/or a caregivers ability to interact with the patient. Such cables often dangle, intersect, tangle, and get caught on objects present or introduced nearby. This can in turn lead to dislodgement of cables from connected physiological sensors/monitors, which can, in some cases, interfere with or stop monitoring of a patient&#39;s physiological condition. The one or more cable prongs  900  can advantageously be used to manage one or more cables in a patient monitoring environment and thus prevent or reduce occurrence of the above-mentioned problems. 
     Cable prong  900  can include a base  902 , a stem  904  extending from the base  902 , and one or more arms  906  extending from the stem  904 . Base  902  can be configured to secure to a portion of a patient, such as skin of the patient. Base  902  can include an adhesive bottom surface, for example, that can adhere to the patient&#39;s skin. Base  902  can have a square, rectangular, circular, triangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal, octagonal, nonagonal, decagonal, or other shape (for example, when viewed from the view of  FIG. 9B ). Base  902  can include an adhesive layer configured to allow for securement of the prong  900  to skin of a patient and a release layer positioned overtop the adhesive layer that is removable. Such adhesive layer can comprise, for example, a silicone adhesive. 
     Stem  904  can extend outward from a surface of base  902 . For example, stem  904  can extend outward from the base  902  in a direction that is non-parallel with respect to a surface of the base  902 , such as perpendicular to the surface of the base  902 . Stem  904  can have a thickness or width that is less than a width of the base  902  (see  FIG. 9C ). Stem  904  can extend from the base  902  and be spaced from sides of the base  902  (see  FIG. 9C ). For example, stem  904  can extend from a middle portion of base  902 . Stem  904  have a length that is equal to or less than a length of the base  902 , where the “length” of the stem  904  and the base  902  is in a direction perpendicular to the “width” of the base  904  (for example, the “length” can refer to “into” the page in the view of  FIG. 9C ). 
     Cable prong  900  can include one or more arms  906  that extend from a portion of the stem  904  and that are sized and/or shaped to receive, retain, surround, and/or secure a portion of a cable (such as a portion of cables  103 ,  105 ,  107 , and/or  109 ). For example, cable prong  900  can include one, two, three, or four arms extending from stem  904 . As another example, cable prong  900  can include a first arm  906  extending from a first side of stem  904  and a second arm  906  extending from a second side of stem  904  opposite the first side  904  (see  FIG. 9A-9C ). The one or more arms  906  can extend from the stem  904  proximate a free (top) end of the stem  904  opposite the base  904 . The one or more arms  906  can extend from stem  904  in one or more directions. For example, the one or more arms  906  can extend generally perpendicular to stem  904  and can curl in a direction facing away from base  902 . Alternatively, the one or more arms  906  can extend generally perpendicular to stem  904  and can curl in a direction toward base  902 . The one or more arms  906  can be rounded or non-rounded. The one or more arms  906  can comprise a partially circular, partially square, or partially rectangular cross-section. The one or more arms  906  can extend outward from stem  904  and define an open region that is sized and/or shaped to receive, retain, surround, and/or secure a portion of a cable (such as a portion of cables  103 ,  105 ,  107 , and/or  109 ). The one or more arms  906  can have a C-shape (see  FIG. 9C ). Alternatively, the one or more arms  906  can have an L-shape, U-shape, J-shape, among other shapes. 
     While  FIGS. 9A-9C  illustrate a cable prong  900  having two, opposing arms  906 , cable prong  900  could have a single arm  906  extending from a portion of the stem  904 . Moreover, cable prong  900  could have three or four arms  906 , where each of the arms  906  extend from different ones of four surfaces of stem  904 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 1A-1B , one or more cable prongs  900  can be utilized within patient monitoring system  100  to secure one or more of cables  103 ,  105 ,  107 , and/or  109 . For example, patient monitoring system  100  can include a first cable prong  900  which can secure to a portion of cable  109  and also secure to a portion of the skin of patient  111  between the optical sensor  140  and the patient monitor  130  (for example, on or near a wrist of patient  111 ). Additionally or alternatively, patient monitoring system  100  can include a second cable prong  900  which can secure to a portion of cable  107  and also secure to a portion of the skin of patient  111  between the patient monitor  130  and the blood pressure monitor  120  (for example, at or near an elbow of patient  111 ). Additionally or alternatively, patient monitoring system  100  can include a third cable prong  900  which can secure to a portion of cable  105  and also secure to a portion of the skin of patient  111  between the blood pressure monitor  120  and the ECG device  110  (for example, at or near an upper chest or collar bone of patient  111 ). Additionally or alternatively, patient monitoring system  100  can include a fourth cable prong  900  which can secure to a portion of cable  103  and also secure to a portion of the skin of patient  111  between the patient monitor  130  and the blood pressure monitor  120  (for example, at or near an elbow of patient  11 ). As an alternative to having two separate prongs  900  for securing cables  103  and  107 , for example, at or near an elbow of patient  111 , a single prong  900  can be used to secure both of cables  103  and  107 . Such dual securement of cables  103  and  107  is possible with prong  900  where prong  900  has more than one wing  906  as described and shown above. Additionally or alternatively, patient monitoring system  100  can include a fifth cable prong  900  which can secure to a portion of cable  103  and also secure to a portion of the skin of patient  111  between the blood pressure monitor  120  and the acoustic sensor  150  (for example, at or near a neck or shoulder of patient  111 ). While the terms “first,” “second,”, “third,” “fourth,” and “fifth” have been used above, such usage is for convenience only and is not intended to convey that the presence of the “fifth,” “fourth,”, “third,” “second,” or “first” prong  900  requires the presence of any of the other numbered prongs  900  and/or requires the other prongs  900  to be positioned in the example manner described above. 
     ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 
     Although this invention has been disclosed in the context of certain preferred embodiments, it should be understood that certain advantages, features and aspects of the systems, devices, and methods may be realized in a variety of other embodiments. Additionally, it is contemplated that various aspects and features described herein can be practiced separately, combined together, or substituted for one another, and that a variety of combination and subcombinations of the features and aspects can be made and still fall within the scope of the invention. Furthermore, the systems and devices described above need not include all of the modules and functions described in the preferred embodiments. 
     Conditional language used herein, such as, among others, “can,” “could,” “might,” “may,” “e.g.,” and the like, unless specifically stated otherwise, or otherwise understood within the context as used, is generally intended to convey that certain features, elements, and/or steps are optional. Thus, such conditional language is not generally intended to imply that features, elements, and/or steps are in any way required or that one or more embodiments necessarily include logic for deciding, with or without other input or prompting, whether these features, elements, and/or steps are included or are to be always performed. The terms “comprising,” “including,” “having,” and the like are synonymous and are used inclusively, in an open-ended fashion, and do not exclude additional elements, features, acts, operations, and so forth. Also, the term “or” is used in its inclusive sense (and not in its exclusive sense) so that when used, for example, to connect a list of elements, the term “or” means one, some, or all of the elements in the list. Further, the term “each,” as used herein, in addition to having its ordinary meaning, can mean any subset of a set of elements to which the term “each” is applied. 
     Conjunctive language such as the phrase “at least one of X, Y, and Z,” unless specifically stated otherwise, is otherwise understood with the context as used in general to convey that an item, term, etc. may be either X, Y, or Z. Thus, such conjunctive language is not generally intended to imply that certain embodiments require the presence of at least one of X, at least one of Y, and at least one of Z. 
     Language of degree used herein, such as the terms “approximately,” “about,” “generally,” and “substantially” as used herein represent a value, amount, or characteristic close to the stated value, amount, or characteristic that still performs a desired function or achieves a desired result. For example, the terms “approximately”, “about”, “generally,” and “substantially” may refer to an amount that is within less than 10% of, within less than 5% of, within less than 1% of, within less than 0.1% of, and within less than 0.01% of the stated amount. As another example, in certain embodiments, the terms “generally parallel” and “substantially parallel” refer to a value, amount, or characteristic that departs from exactly parallel by less than or equal to 10 degrees, 5 degrees, 3 degrees, or 1 degree. As another example, in certain embodiments, the terms “generally perpendicular” and “substantially perpendicular” refer to a value, amount, or characteristic that departs from exactly perpendicular by less than or equal to 10 degrees, 5 degrees, 3 degrees, or 1 degree. 
     Although certain embodiments and examples have been described herein, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that many aspects of the systems and devices shown and described in the present disclosure may be differently combined and/or modified to form still further embodiments or acceptable examples. All such modifications and variations are intended to be included herein within the scope of this disclosure. A wide variety of designs and approaches are possible. No feature, structure, or step disclosed herein is essential or indispensable. 
     Any methods disclosed herein need not be performed in the order recited. The methods disclosed herein may include certain actions taken by a practitioner; however, they can also include any third-party instruction of those actions, either expressly or by implication. 
     The methods and tasks described herein may be performed and fully automated by a computer system. The computer system may, in some cases, include multiple distinct computers or computing devices (e.g., physical servers, workstations, storage arrays, cloud computing resources, etc.) that communicate and interoperate over a network to perform the described functions. Each such computing device typically includes a processor (or multiple processors) that executes program instructions or modules stored in a memory or other non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or device (e.g., solid state storage devices, disk drives, etc.). The various functions disclosed herein may be embodied in such program instructions, and/or may be implemented in application-specific circuitry (e.g., ASICs or FPGAs) of the computer system. Where the computer system includes multiple computing devices, these devices may, but need not, be co-located. The results of the disclosed methods and tasks may be persistently stored by transforming physical storage devices, such as solid state memory chips and/or magnetic disks, into a different state. The computer system may be a cloud-based computing system whose processing resources are shared by multiple distinct business entities or other users. 
     Depending on the embodiment, certain acts, events, or functions of any of the processes or algorithms described herein can be performed in a different sequence, can be added, merged, or left out altogether (for example, not all described operations or events are necessary for the practice of the algorithm). Moreover, in certain embodiments, operations or events can be performed concurrently, e.g., through multi-threaded processing, interrupt processing, or multiple processors or processor cores or on other parallel architectures, rather than sequentially. 
     Various illustrative logical blocks, modules, routines, and algorithm steps that may be described in connection with the disclosure herein can be implemented as electronic hardware (e.g., ASICs or FPGA devices), computer software that runs on general purpose computer hardware, or combinations of both. Various illustrative components, blocks, and steps may be described herein generally in terms of their functionality. Whether such functionality is implemented as specialized hardware versus software running on general-purpose hardware depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the overall system. The described functionality can be implemented in varying ways for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the disclosure. 
     Moreover, various illustrative logical blocks and modules that may be described in connection with the disclosure herein can be implemented or performed by a machine, such as a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general purpose processor can be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the processor can be a controller, microcontroller, or state machine, combinations of the same, or the like. A processor can include electrical circuitry configured to process computer-executable instructions. A processor can include an FPGA or other programmable device that performs logic operations without processing computer-executable instructions. A processor can also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration. Although described herein primarily with respect to digital technology, a processor may also include primarily analog components. For example, some or all of the rendering techniques described herein may be implemented in analog circuitry or mixed analog and digital circuitry. A computing environment can include any type of computer system, including, but not limited to, a computer system based on a microprocessor, a mainframe computer, a digital signal processor, a portable computing device, a device controller, or a computational engine within an appliance, to name a few. 
     The elements of any method, process, routine, or algorithm described in connection with the disclosure herein can be embodied directly in hardware, in a software module executed by a processor, or in a combination of the two. A software module can reside in RAM memory, flash memory, ROM memory, EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. An example storage medium can be coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. In the alternative, the storage medium can be integral to the processor. The processor and the storage medium can reside in an ASIC. The ASIC can reside in a user terminal. In the alternative, the processor and the storage medium can reside as discrete components in a user terminal. 
     While the above detailed description has shown, described, and pointed out novel features, it can be understood that various omissions, substitutions, and changes in the form and details of the devices or algorithms illustrated can be made without departing from the spirit of the disclosure. As can be recognized, certain portions of the description herein can be embodied within a form that does not provide all of the features and benefits set forth herein, as some features can be used or practiced separately from others. The scope of certain embodiments disclosed herein is indicated by the appended claims rather than by the foregoing description. All changes which come within the meaning and range of equivalency of the claims are to be embraced within their scope.